220
MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN M/Bm6 Version P631 -305/6/7/8 -403/4/5/6/7/8 -610/11/20/21 P632 -305/6/7/8 -403/4/5/6/7/8 -610/11/20/21 P633 -305/6/7/8 -404/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12 -610/11/20/21 P634 -305/6/7/8 -403/4/5/6/7/8 -610/11/20/21 Technical Manual Content P63x/EN M/Ca4 (-610) P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (-611/620) P63x/EN AD/Am6 (-621) Volume 2 of 2

P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

  • Upload
    lamdiep

  • View
    253

  • Download
    11

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices

P63x/EN M/Bm6

Version P631 -305/6/7/8 -403/4/5/6/7/8 -610/11/20/21 P632 -305/6/7/8 -403/4/5/6/7/8 -610/11/20/21 P633 -305/6/7/8 -404/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12 -610/11/20/21 P634 -305/6/7/8 -403/4/5/6/7/8 -610/11/20/21

Technical Manual

Content P63x/EN M/Ca4 (-610) P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (-611/620) P63x/EN AD/Am6 (-621)

Volume 2 of 2

Page 2: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408
Page 3: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices

P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D)

Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620 P632 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620 P633 -306/307/308 -407/408/409/410/411/412 -611/620 P634 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620

Upgrade Documentation

Page 4: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408
Page 5: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Contents 1 5Overview

2 Operation 132.1 Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (LOC) 13 2.2 Serial Interfaces 15 2.3 Configurable Function Keys (F_KEY) 16 2.4 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (INP) 19 2.5 Measured Data Input (MEASI) 20 2.6 Main Functions of the P63x (MAIN) 21 2.7 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (CBF_1 to CBF_4) 37 2.8 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (DEV01 to DEV03)

(P632, P633 only) 50 2.9 Interlocking Logic (ILOCK)

(P632, P633 only) 65 2.10 Single-Pole Commands (CMD_1)

(P632, P633 only) 67 2.11 Single-Pole Signals (SIG_1)

(P632, P633 only) 68

3 Design 70 3.1 Detachable HMI 70

4 User Interface (HMI) 73 4.1 Display and Keypad 73 4.2 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general) 75 4.3 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (particularly as control keys)

(P632, P633 only) 77

5 Settings 78 5.1 Parameters 78

6 Information and Control Functions 98 6.1 Operation 98 6.2 Fault and Event Records 106

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-3

Page 6: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

With these latest versions for the transformer differential protection devices MiCOM P631, P632, P633 and P634 several new features and changes on existing features have been added. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below.

References Released Version Documentation

01.03.2006 P631-304-403/404-610 Technical Manual P632-304-403/404-610 P63x/EN M/Ba4 (AFSV.12.09700 D) P633-304-404/405/406-610 P634-304-403/404-610

Besides the changes carried out with version -620 this detailed upgrade documentation also considers changes carried out with version -611 and therefore replaces the following document:

Released Version Documentation

12.12.2007 P631-306-405/406-611 Upgrade documentation P632-306-405/406-611 P63x/EN AD/Ab5 P633-306-407/408/409-611 (AFSV.12.09970 D) P634-306-405/406-611

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-4

Page 7: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

1 Overview

Version Changes

P631-305-403/404-610-710 Hardware No modifications P632-305-403/404-610-710 P633-305-404/405/406

-610-710 P634-305-403/404-610-710

Diagram

Software

No modifications

Note: This version is not released for applications with IEC 61850 systems! Version -610-714 may be used as an alternative.

Release: 23.06.2006 DIFF Bug fixing: In versions -606 to -610 inrush signaling from all three measuring systems was suppressed when harmonic blocking in measuring system 1 was triggered. This was not accompanied by tripping.

Nevertheless there was the possibility of an overreaction (tripping) when an inrush condition was not recognized by one measuring system with the operating mode set to "Not phase-selective" and in an other measuring system the second harmonic component reached a value of approximately between 70% and 130% of the fundamental.

FT_DA Bug fixing: The fault data for F T _ D A : F a u l t c u r r . I Y , b p . u . (026 088) were mistakenly calculated on the basis of current IY,a.

P631-305-403/404-610-711 Hardware No modifications P632-305-403/404-610-711 P633-305-404/405/406

-610-711

Diagram

Software

No modifications

This version is not released. P634-305-403/404-610-711 Release: ---

P631-305-403/404-610-712 Hardware No modifications P632-305-403/404-610-712 P633-305-404/405/406

-610-712 P634-305-403/404-610-712

Diagram

Software

No modifications

Note: This version is not released for applications with IEC 61850 systems! Version -610-714 may be used as an alternative.

Release: 09.10.2006 IEC Bug fixing: The cause for a break in the client-server communications link after approximately 49 days for about 20 minutes has been removed. GOOSE and GSSE were not affected by this break in the client-server communications link.

Bug fixing: If communication was interrupted during control access via the Ethernet interface using the operating program MiCOM S1, renewed control access was only possible after a warm restart of the protection and control unit.

COMM1 The upgraded communications software 3.18 is now implemented. Various small bugs have been fixed in communication protocols per IEC 60870-5-101 and MODBUS.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-5

Page 8: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Changes

P631-305-403/404-610-713 Hardware No modifications P632-305-403/404-610-713 P633-305-404/405/406

-610-713 P634-305-403/404-610-713

Diagram

Software

No modifications

Note: This version is not released for applications with IEC 61850 systems! Version -610-714 may be used as an alternative.

Release: 12.12.2006 MAIN Bug fixing: The sequence of M A I N : G e n e r a l s t a r t i n g (036 000) and D I F F : T r i p s i g n a l (041 075) have been changed such that starting always comes first.

P631-305-403/404-610-714 Hardware No modifications P632-305-403/404-610-714 P633-305-404/405/406

-610-714

Diagram

Software

No modifications

P634-305-403/404-610-714 Release: 07.02.2007

IEC Bug fixing: The cause for a break in the client-server communications link after approximately 49 days for about 20 minutes has been removed. GOOSE and GSSE were not affected by this break in the client-server communications link.

P631-306-405/406-611 P632-306-405/406-611 P633-306-407/408/409-611

Hardware As an ordering option for the 40TE and 84TE model versions there is now a variant available with a detachable HMI. The detachable HMI is always supplied with a case width of 40TE.

P634-306-405/406-611 The detachable HMI provides the following new features:

Release: 15.03.2007 � 6 freely configurable function keys as well as 6 freely configurable LED indicators (H18 to H23) each situated next to a function key.

P631-307-405/406-611 P632-307-405/406-611 P633-307-407/408/409-611 P634-307-405/406-611

Release: 05.11.2007

� The freely configurable LED indicators (H4 to H16 and H18 to H23) are provided as multi-color LEDs.

Note:

When the local control panel is ordered together with a detachable HMI for version -306, it is delivered with function keys and multi-colored LED indicators fitted. Otherwise the earlier local control panel is delivered without having function keys and multi-colored LED indicators fitted.

With version -307 and irrelevant of the ordering option, the local control panel is delivered with function keys and multi-colored LED indicators fitted.

Diagram The updated connection diagrams now include the interfaces to connect the detachable HMI.

P631.405 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P631.406 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)

P632.405 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P632.406 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)

P633.407 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P633.408 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection) P633.409 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)

P634.405 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P634.406 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)

Version

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-6

Page 9: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version Changes

Software LOC Because of the ordering option "detachable HMI" this additional Device

Identification parameter is now available: L O C : L o c a l H M I exists (221 099).

LOC MAIN

Respective binary signal inputs (if previously unavailable) are assigned to all default reset functions. These binary input functions are now available in the configuration list for the two newly implemented group resetting functions as well as the extended functional assignment for the CLEAR key ('C'):

M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t 1 (005 248) M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t 2 (005 249) LOC: A s s i g n m e n t r e s e t k e y (005 251)

Two menu jump lists may now be configured. These menu jump lists make it possible to select individual menu points (i.e. set values, counters, triggering functions, event logs) in a freely definable sequence.

L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t 1 ( 0 3 0 2 3 8 ) L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t 2 ( 0 3 0 2 3 9 )

IEC Implementation of active monitoring of the communications data links to logged-on clients with the parameter I E C : T C P k e e p - a l i v e t i m e r ( 1 0 4 0 6 2 ) . This active monitoring now replaces previous passive monitoring using parameter I E C : I n a c t i v i t y t i m e r ( 1 0 4 0 5 0 ) .

Implementation of an automatic switchover to daylight saving time, activated by parameter I E C : S w i t c h . d a y l . s a v . t i m e (104 219). Switchover times for the automatic switch to daylight saving time are governed by the following settings:

I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t a r t (104 220) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . d (104 221) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . m (104 222) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + (104 223) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e e n d (104 225) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e e n d d (104 226) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e e n d m (104 227) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . e n d 0 : 0 0 + (104 228)

A second SNTP server may now be applied for time synchronization. Should no answer be transmitted by the first SNTP server the next request is automatically transferred to the second SNTP server (backup function).

I E C : S N T P s e r v e r 1 I P ( 1 0 4 2 0 2 ) I E C : S N T P s e r v e r 2 I P ( 1 0 4 2 1 0 )

Instead of setting a router address and target network, so as to establish a communication link to a client situated exterior to the local network, now only the setting of the gateway address is required via I E C : G a t e w a y a d d r e s s (104 011).

Now 'unbuffered reports' are available for all logical nodes.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-7

Page 10: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Changes

LED The new detachable HMI provides the following extended display functionalities:

� The operating mode for the LED indicators has been extended by the operating mode LED flashing.

� Two differing signals may now be assigned to the freely configurable LED indicators (H 4 to H 16 and H 18 to H 23) to emit either red or green light. If both assigned signals are active the resulting LED color will be 'amber' (yellow).

Configuration, operating mode and physical state of the permanently configured LED indicators H1 and H17 are now displayed via configuration parameters and physical state signals.

F_KEY The new detachable HMI provides 6 freely configurable function keys operated either as a key or switch with or without password protection.

CBF_1 ... CBF_3

Implementation of the new circuit breaker failure protection function including a current reset criterion. Depending on the number of ends on the protected object there are up to 4 function groups available.

P631-306/307-405/406 -611-715

P632-306/307-405/406 -611-715

Hardware

Diagram

Software

No modifications

No modifications

P633-306/307-407/408/409 -611-715

P634-306/307-405/406 -611-715

Release: 12.06.2007

LOC Bug fixing: Reset functions configured to the CLEAR key ('C') are now carried out correctly. A system restart could previously occur when the detachable HMI was disconnected.

FT_DA Bug fixing: The fault data for differential current and restraining current issued by the ground differential protection functions REF_2 and REF_3 are now also calculated correctly when the operating mode is set to "Low imped. / IP,max" (previously they had twice the value).

REF_1 ...REF_3

When the differential protection is triggered these functions are now blocked as long as at least one of the following conditions is met:

D I F F : M e a s . s y s t e m 1 t r i g g . (041 124) D I F F : M e a s . s y s t e m 2 t r i g g . (041 125) D I F F : M e a s . s y s t e m 3 t r i g g . (041 126)

CBF_1 ... CBF_3

Timer stages 't1 3p' and 't2' of functions CBF_2…CBF_4 are now processed regardless of the setting at CBF_1.

IEC The ICD files have been modified. urcbMX has been added to the logical nodes PhsPDIF1, Rf1PDIF1, Rf2PDIF1 and Rf3PDIF2.

Implementation of the communication protocol IEC 61850 in these versions is KEMA certified.

Version

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-8

Page 11: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version Changes P631-306-405/406-611-716 P632-306-405/406-611-716 P633-306-407/408/409

-611-716

Hardware

Diagram

Software

No modifications

No modifications

P634-306-405/406-611-716

Release: 31.08.2007 IEC The data model of the measured operating values for differential current

and restraining current in the functions DIFF and REF_n is now implemented according to the data attributes for the standard WYE, ACT and ACD classes.

Note: With this implementation, the "phase" measured values from the DIFF protection functions correspond to the measured values of the three measuring systems: "phSA" = Measuring system 1 "phSB" = Measuring system 2 "phSC" = Measuring system 3

Accordingly the measured values from the REF_n protection functions are modeled as "neut".

ICD and PICS-MICS-ADL files have been upgraded accordingly. P631-308-407/408-620 P632-308-407/408-620

Hardware The binary I/O module X (4H) with four high-break contacts is now available.

P633-308-410/411/412-620 P634-308-407/408-620

With the P632/P633, the binary I/O module X (6xI, 6xO) for the control of up to three switchgear units is available as an additional option.

Release: 06.06.2008 Diagram The updated connection diagrams now include the new binary I/O module X (4H) and the binary I/O module X (6xI, 6xO).

P631 -407 P631 -408

(for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) (for 40TE case, ring-terminal connection)

P632 -407 P632 -408

(for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)

P633 -410 P633 -411 P633 -412

(for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection) (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)

P634 -407 P634 -408

(for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection) (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)

Software DVICE The previous parameter

D V I C E : O r d e r N o . (000 001) has been renamed to

D V I C E : A F S O r d e r N o . (001 000).

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-9

Page 12: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version Changes

LOC The previous parameters L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e s e t k e y (005 251) and L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y (080 110)

have been renamed to L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y (005 251) and L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y (080 110)

without any changes in their functionality.

Now the selection offered for the parameter L O C : L a n g u a g e (003 020)

no longer is between, e.g. German, and English but between Regional language and Reference language. (This will not cause any changes in functionality as the Reference language is US English and the Regional language will depend on the language order option.)

IEC The menu point C O M M 1 : - 1 0 3 p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 178) is now available when the communications protocol IEC 60870-5-103 is set.

GOOSE P632, P633 only: Several GOOSE signals have been added as part of the new control functionality. For a detailed listing see sections "Settings / Configuration Parameters" and "Information and Control Functions / Logic State Signals".

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-10

Page 13: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version Changes

MAIN The following menu points are now available for each parameter subset: M A I N : V n o m p r i m . e n d a P S x M A I N : V n o m p r i m . e n d b P S x M A I N : V n o m p r i m . e n d c P S x M A I N : V n o m p r i m . e n d d P S x

The following menu point has been renamed: M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e

(previously: M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d ) The following parameters are now available for status signals from external devices (CBx = CB1 to CB4):

M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x o p e n M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x c l o s e d

Note: These signal assignment parameters are visible for 4 circuit breakers with P631, P632, P633 and P634. However, they can only be used with the P632 and P633 and only in accordance with the number of CBs supported. In order to configure function keys with control functions the P632 and P633 have the following parameters available which may be assigned to four of the six function keys:

M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y M A I N : D e v i c e O P E N k e y M A I N : D e v i c e C L O S E k e y M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y

(006 001) (006 002) (006 003) (006 004)

The P632 and P633 now feature the acquisition of debounced binary signals for control functions, and the parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g .

As part of the control functionality the P632 and P633 now feature additional parameters.

M A I N : T y p e o f b a y (220 001) M A I N : C u s t o m i z e d b a y t y p e (221 062)

MEASI The result of the temperature measurement may now be also read out as the maximum value since the last reset operation (temperature Tmax).

INP The setting I N P : F i l t e r (010 220) is now available for conformity with standard IEC 60255-22-7, class A.

FT_DA Correction: The wrong internal timing where the parameter F T _ D A : R u n t i m e t o m e a s . (004 199)

could take on the value 'Overflow' has been corrected.

THRM1, THRM2

Correction: With the following menu points the step size for temperature values has be reduced from 0.01 to 0.001.

T H R M 1 : O b j e c t t e m p . p . u . 1 T H R M 2 : O b j e c t t e m p . p . u . 2 T H R M 1 : C o o l a n t t e m p . p . u . 1 T H R M 2 : C o o l a n t t e m p . p . u . 2

(004 205) (004 208) (004 206) (004 209)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-11

Page 14: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620

Version Changes

CBF_x The previous parameter C B F _ 1 : F u n c t i o n g r o u p C B F (056 007)

has been renamed to C B F _ 1 : F u n c t i o n g r o u p C B F _ 1 (056 007)

without any changes in the functionality.

The following parameters may now not only be set to an explicit time value but also to 'Blocked'.

C B F _ 2 : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B C B F _ 3 : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B C B F _ 4 : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B

(022 227) (022 240) (022 254)

The startup criterion has been modified. After a CBF startup the state of the general trip signal or the external trigger signal are now no longer considered. The CBF will then only reset if the current criterion is met (current values to fall below I< with all three phases) or the CB state is open.

DEV01 to DEV03 (P632, P633 only)

New function groups "External Devices xx" (xx = 01, 02, 03) as part of the implementation of control functions.

ILOCK (P632, P633 only)

New function group "Interlocking Logic" as part of the implementation of control functions.

CMD_1 (P632, P633 only)

New function group "Single Pole Commands" as part of the implementation of control functions.

SIG_1 (P632, P633 only)

New function group "Single Pole Signals" as part of the implementation of control functions.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-12

Page 15: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2 Operation

2.1 Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (Function Group LOC)

Function keys on the front panel user interface (HMI)

The new detachable HMI (as of version -611) provides 6 freely configurable function keys. Either a single function, one of the two group resetting functions or one of the two menu jump lists may be assigned to each of these function keys with the setting parameter F _ K e y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6).

As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure U-2 Function key F1 is only enabled after the associated password, as defined at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y 1 , has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function keys F2 to F6.

Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting Mechanisms' as well as in section 4.2 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'.

Note: Each of the 6 keys has an LED indicator situated next to it which is freely configurable, such as the other 12 LED indicators, but independent of the configuration of the function keys (i.e. the function assignment is for red and green light emission).

Selection of the control point (P632, P633)

As of version -620 the function keys available on the units P632 and P633 can also be configured as control keys (e.g. Local/Remote, Device Selection, Device OPEN, Device CLOSE). See figure U-1 and section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys (P632, P633 only)'. Therefore new settings have been added to function group HMI.

Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. Switching between local and remote control is achieved using either an appropriately configured function key or an external key switch. The position of this switch is checked via an appropriately configured input (configuration at M A I N : I n p . a s g . L / R k e y s w . )

For further information on the application of a function key to switch the control point from 'Local' to 'Remote' refer to sections 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'.

The setting at L O C : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y determines whether the control point is switched (using either the L/R key or the key switch) from 'Local' to 'Remote' control (L↔R) or from 'Local+Remote' to 'Local' control (R&L↔L) and back again.

If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. If only local control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-13

Page 16: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

U-1

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

12Z6261 A_EN

≥1 R1

S1 1

LOC: Rem.acc.block.active[ 221 004 ]

LOC: Loc.acc.block.active[ 221 005 ]

LOC: Local & Remote Control

305 560

MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key sw.[ 221 008 ]

LOC: Fct. assign.L/R key

[ 225 208 ]

1: R <-> L 2: R & L <-> L

1

2

1

2,3

Local 1

Remote 2

Local & Remote 3

1) Key of the local control panel

m out of n

F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F1 [ 080 112 ]

Selected signal

Signal 1

Signal 2

Signal 3

Signal n

Without function

Local/Remote key [006 004]

1)

F1

≥1

&

& &

&0

1

≥1

&

&

&

Selection of the control point (The same applies to the other function keys F2 to F6.)

Configuration of the READ key

As with L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x up to 16 functions may also be selected from the same menu jump list at L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y . They are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the "READ" key.

Configuration of the CLEAR key ('C')

Similar to the setting at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x up to 10 reset functions may be selected from a list at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y . These are carried out by pressing the "CLEAR" C key.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-14

Page 17: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.2 Serial interfaces

2.2.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE)

2.2.1.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)

Control of switchgear units (P632, P633)

Control of switchgear units (external devices) by the P63x can be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the device. Only one control command is executed at a time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the execution of such a command are rejected. To have clients control switchgear units (external devices) the following operating modes can be set at I E C : D E V c o n t r o l m o d e l :

� Control service mode � Direct control with enhanced security � SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security

When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is selected by the client before the control command is issued. Because of this selection the switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by other clients are rejected. If, after a selection no control command is issued by the client, the P63x resets this selection after 2 minutes have elapsed.

The switchgear units’ contact positions signalled to the clients are made with the Report Control Blocks of the switchgear units.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-15

Page 18: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.3 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)

The P63x includes six additional function keys that are freely configurable. Function keys F1 to Fx will only be enabled after the password has been entered at F _ K e y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y x .

As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure U-2. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function keys F2 to F6. Exception: If a function key is configured as a control key a password request is only issued when the command "Local/Remote switching" has been assigned to this function key.

Configuration of function keys with a single function

Each function key may be configured with a single function by selecting a logic state signal at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6), but with the exception: L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). This function is triggered by pressing the respective function key on the P63x.

Configuration of the function keys with a group resetting function

Respective binary signal inputs (if previously unavailable) are assigned to all default reset functions. Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two group resetting functions assigned at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) by selecting the listing at M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x E X T (x: 1 or 2). By pressing the assigned function key all (up to 10) reset actions selected at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x (x: 1 or 2) are triggered.

Configuration of function keys with menu jump lists

Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two menu jump lists assigned at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) by selecting the listing at L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). The functions of the selected menu jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the assigned function key.

Both menu jump lists are assembled at L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x (x: 1 or 2). Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters, event counters and/or event logs may be selected.

Note: LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the respective function key configuration.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-16

Page 19: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Configuration of function keys as control keys (P632, P633 only)

Each function key may be configured as a control key by selecting one of the listings at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6).

• M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y

• M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y

• M A I N : D e v i c e O P E N k e y

• M A I N : D e v i c e C L O S E k e y

These control functions may only be used sensibly if all four of the above commands have been configured thus engaging four of the available six function keys.

Operating mode of the function keys

For each function key the operating mode may be selected at F _ K E Y : O p e r a t i n g m o d e F x (Fx: F1 to F6). Here it is possible to select whether the function key operates as a key or as a switch. In the operating mode 'Key' the selected function is active while the function key is pressed. In the operating mode 'Switch' the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed. The state of the function keys can be displayed.

Exception: For function keys configured as control keys the operating mode is irrelevant and it is therefore ignored.

Handling keys If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when a function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be triggered when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for the other keys.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-17

Page 20: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

U-2

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a menu jump list.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-18

Page 21: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.4 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)

Filter function An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes 'Active "High", Filt.' or 'Active "Low", Filt.'). With this function enabled a status change at the binary logic input is only signalled when the input signal remains at a steady signal level during a set number of sampling steps (sampling step size = period / 20). The number of sampling steps is set at parameter I N P : F i l t e r .

12Z6213 A_EN

INP: Fct.assignm.Uxx

[ XXX XXX ]

&

&

Meas. Function

INP: Mode U xxx [ YYY XXX ]

&

0: active "Low" 1: active "High"2: active "Low", filt.3: active "High",filt.

Input signal

0

1

2

3

Function 1 EXT

Function 2 EXT

Function 3 EXT

Function n EXT

Function enabled

-Uxxx

INP: Filter

[ 010 220 ]

&

&

&

&

INP: ControlU xxx[ ZZZ ZZZ ]

Configuration and operating mode of binary signal inputs (This diagram replaces figure 3-18 in the technical manual for version -610)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-19

U-3

Page 22: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

U-4

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.5 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)

2.5.1 Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer

The result of a temperature measurement cannot only be read out as a direct measured value (temperature T) or as a normalized value (temperature norm. T), but also as the maximum value since the last reset (temperature Tmax).

For this the following menu points are available:

M E A S I : T e m p e r a t u r e T m a x (maximum temperature value) M E A S I : R e s e t T m a x E X T (reset via a binary signal) M E A S I : R e s e t T m a x U S E R (manual reset)

64Z70H3A_EN

CHECK: PT100 opencircuit[ 098 024 ]

MEASI: PT100faulty[ 040 190 ]

MEASI: Temperature[ 004 133 ]

MEASI: Enabled[ 035 008 ]

PT 100 Analog input

C

+

-

MEASI: Temperaturep.u[ 004 221 ]

MEASI: TemperatureTmax[ 004 233 ]

Temperature measurement with a resistance thermometer (This diagram replaces figure 3-24 in the technical manual for version -610)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-20

Page 23: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

U-5

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6 Main Functions of the P63x (Function Group MAIN)

2.6.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control - (P632, P633 only)

In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the functions real time acquisition (time tagging), debouncing and chatter suppression are included as standard. Each of these signals can be assigned to one of three groups and for each of these groups the debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set. Matching of these two parameters achieves the suppression of multiple spurious pickups.

64Z7034A_UK

2

1

MAIN: Chatt.Mon.Time Gr.1

[ 221 201 ]

DEV01: Debounced cl.signal

310 045

3

2

1

3

MAIN: Debounce Time Gr. 1

[ 221 200 ]

MAIN: Change ofState Gr.1

[ 221 202 ]

Debouncing & Chatter suppression

Group 1

1: Group 1

2: Group 2

3: Group 3

1: Group 1

2: Group 2

3: Group 3

SIG_1: SignalS001 EXT [ 226 004 ]

DEV01: Gr. Assign. Debounc.[ 210 011 ]

SIG_1: Gr.Asg. Debounc.S001[ 226 003 ]

DEV01: Open Signal EXT [ 210 030 ]

DEV01: Debounced tr.signal

310 046

SIG_1: Debounced sig. S001

310 044DEV01: ClosedSignal EXT [ 210 031 ]

Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-21

Page 24: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

U-6

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Debouncing The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage.

If the signal is stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram containing the time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. As an alternative the time tag may be generated after debouncing by setting parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g to the value 'After debounce time'.

After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, no telegram is generated.

Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce time has elapsed. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of M A I N : T i m e t a g to the value '1stEdge,OpMem unsort') they are not necessarily saved in chronological order in the operating data memory. If above parameter has been set to the value '1stEdge,OpMem sorted' then all entries are always saved in chronological order in the operating data memory.

Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge (e.g. parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g set to the value '1stEdge,OpMem Unsort' or '1stEdge,OpMem Sorted'.) Example: Set debouncing time: 50 ms

s: start e: end

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-22

Page 25: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

U-7

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.2 Selection of the Bay Type - (P632, P633 only)

The P63x is designed to control up to three switchgear units. The Bay type defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units.

The P63x offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. Should the required bay type be missing from the standard selection then the user can contact the manufacturer of the P63x to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P63x. By applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the user can also define new bay types. The number of this additional bay type will then be displayed at M A I N : C u s t o m i z e d b a y t y p e .

Once the user has selected a bay type, the P63x can automatically configure the binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of switchgear units. The assignment of inputs and outputs for an automatic configuration is shown in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.

12Z51AQB_UK

MAIN: DEVxx is a C.B.

306 044

MAIN: Type of Bay[ 220 001 ]

MAIN: Auto-Assignment I/O

[ 221 065 ]

BB1

Q0

MAIN: Customized Bay Type[ 221 062 ]

Selection of the bay type

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-23

Page 26: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

U-8

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.3 Function Blocks - (P632, P633 only)

By including function blocks in the bay interlock conditions, switching operations can be prevented independent of the switching status at the time, for example, by an external signal "CB drive not ready" or by the trip command from an external protection device.

Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or output signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to the function blocks 1 and 2 by setting a '1 out of n' parameter. The input signal from the function blocks starts a timer stage and after it has elapsed, the signal M A I N : F c t . b l o c k . x a c t i v e is issued.

Function blocks

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-24

Page 27: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.4 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Signals - (P632, P633 only)

Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or ...) that represents the circuit breaker. Coupling between control and protection for the "Closed" position signal is made by the setting at M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x c l o s e d (x = 1 to 4). In the same way coupling between control and protection for the "Open" position signal is made by the setting at M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x o p e n (x = 1 to 4). As a result, the CB status signal needs to be assigned to a binary signal input only if this coupling is implemented.

Note: With all unit versions, P631 to P634, these signal assignments are visible for four circuit breakers, but can only be used with P632 and P633 according to the number of supported CBs.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-25

Page 28: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

U-9

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

64Z7032 A_UK

MAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT[ * ]

DEV03: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 131 ]

DEV01: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 031 ]

DEV02: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 081 ]

MAIN: Sig. Asg. CB1 Closed

[ * ]

Selected signal MAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT[ * ]

021 020 MAIN: Sig. Asg. CB1 Closed

MAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT

x: 1

036 051

021 060

x: 2

036 230

021 062

x: 3

036 231

021 064

x: 4

036 232

Coupling between control and protection for the CB closed signal

64Z7035 A_UK

MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT[ * ]

DEV03: Open Signal EXT[ 210 130 ]

DEV01: Open Signal EXT[ 210 030 ]

DEV02: Open Signal EXT[ 210 080 ]

MAIN: Sig. Asg. CBx Open

[ * ]

Selected signal MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT[ * ]

021 017 MAIN: Sig. Asg. CBx Open

MAIN: CBx Open3p EXT

x: 1

031 028

021 061

x: 2

031 046

021 063

x: 3

031 047

021 065

x: 4

031 048

U-10 Coupling between control and protection for the CB open signal

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-26

Page 29: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.5 Multiple Signals - (P632, P633 only)

The multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function using OR operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple signaling is defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment with the corresponding multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal are generated. The stored signal is reset by the following actions:

� General reset

� Latching reset

� The LED indicators have been reset.

� A command received through the communication interface.

If the multiple signaling is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal will follow the updated signal.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-27

Page 30: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

12Z62FMA_EN

MAIN: Generalreset EXT[ 005 255 ]

MAIN: Mult.sig. 2 active[ 221 053 ]

MAIN: Generalreset USER[ 003 002 ]1: execute

COMM1: Resetmult. sig. 1[ --- --- ]

COMM1: Resetmult. sig. 2[ --- --- ]

MAIN: Reset LED 306 020

OUTP: Resetlatching

402 102

R1

S1 1

R1

S1 1

MAIN: Mult.sig. 2 stored[ 221 055 ]

MAIN: Mult.sig. 1 active[ 221 017 ]

MAIN: Mult.sig. 1 stored[ 221 054 ]

Signal 1

Signal 2

Signal 3

Signal n

MAIN: Inp.asg.mult.sig. 1 [ 221 051 ]

Selected signal

MAIN: Inp.asg.mult.sig. 2

[ 221 052 ]

Selected signal

U-11 Multiple signals

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-28

Page 31: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.6 CB Trip Signal - (P632, P633 only)

The signal M A I N : C B t r i p i n t e r n a l is issued if the following conditions are met simultaneously:

� The binary signal input configured for “tripping” is set to a logic value of ' 1 ' or the selected trip command from the P63x is present.

� At the binary signal input configured as “CB trip” a logic value of ' 1 ' is present.

The CB trip signal from an external device can also be signaled. For this task, two binary signal inputs need to be configured as 'CB trip enable ext.' and as 'CB trip ext.'.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-29

Page 32: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

64Z7033 A_UK

DEV03: Switch. Device Open[ 210 136 ]

MAIN: Inp.Asg. CB Trip Ext

[ 021 024 ]

Selected signal

MAIN: CB Tripped [ 221 016 ] Selected signal

Selected signal

Selected signal

MAIN: Inp.Asg.CBTr.En.Ext

[ 221 050 ]

MAIN: Inp. Asg. CB Trip

[ 221 013 ]

MAIN: Prot.Trip>CB Tripped

[ 221 012 ]

MAIN: Inp.Assign.Tripping

[ 221 010 ]

DEV01: Switch. Device Open[ 210 036 ]

DEV02: Switch. Device Open[ 210 086 ]

MAIN: Gen. Trip Command 1[ 036 071 ]

Signal 1

Signal 2

Signal 3

Signal n

MAIN: Gen. Trip Command 2[ 036 022 ]

0: Disabled

1: Gen. Trip Command 1

2: Gen. Trip Command 2

3: Gen. Trip Command 1/2

0

1

2

3

0 3

U-12 CB trip signal

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-30

Page 33: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.7 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions - (P632, P633 only)

Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control functions of the P63x, the P63x first checks whether the switch command may be executed. A switch command will be executed if the optional control enable has been issued and the interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are defined in the interlocking logic for each switching unit within the bay that is subject to control actions and for each control direction (Open/Close). Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without station interlock. The check of bay or station interlock equations can be cancelled for all electrically controllable switchgear units within a bay. If the station interlock is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each switching unit and each control direction (see section ‘Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units').

If “Local” has been selected as the control point, the bay and station interlocks may be cancelled through an appropriately configured binary signal input.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-31

Page 34: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-13 General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or cancelling the interlocks

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-32

Page 35: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-14 Rejection of switching commands

2.6.8 Communication Error - (P632, P633 only)

If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted, the signal 'Communication error' will be issued. This signal will also be issued if communication module A is not fitted.

U-15 Communication error

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-33

Page 36: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.6.9 Resetting Actions

Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways. The following resetting actions (as of version -611) are available:

� Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event data on the front panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. In this case only the displays on the front panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory.

� Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the front panel CLCD by pressing the "CLEAR" key located on the front panel user interface

(HMI). By selecting the required function at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y further memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when the "CLEAR" key is pressed.

� Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) via setting parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . U S E R and set to 'Execute', see also the exact step-for-step description in section 'Reset'.)

� Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example: Assign parameter F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T to the relevant binary signal input e.g. I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 1 2 0 1 .)

� Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x U S E R and setting it to 'Execute'. For this the relevant memories (i.e. those to be reset) must be assigned to parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .

� Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (That is assign parameter M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t . x E X T to the relevant binary signal input, e.g. I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 1 2 0 1 after memories to be reset have been assigned to parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .)

� General resetting by setting parameters (menu point M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t U S E R ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration options.

� General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t E X T is assigned to the relevant binary signal input.) All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration options.

Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory then they all have equal priority.

In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-34

Page 37: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make access especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by configuring them to a function key.

� Function keys may be configured such that resetting of a specific memory is assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately configured binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a binary signal input is simulated. (See section 'Configurable Function Keys'.)

� Similar to this, but one step less direct, is the possibility to assign one of the two menu jump lists (L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T ) to a function key and to include the relevant menu point for a resetting action (e.g. O U T P : R e s e t l a t c h . U S E R ) in the definition (L O C : F c t . F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x ) of the selected menu jump list.

� The same may be achieved with the "READ" key by assigning it a menu point for a resetting action through L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y .

12Z6115 A_EN

MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT[ 065 001 ]

MAIN: Resetindicat. USER[ 021 010 ]

0

1

0: don't execute 1: execute

MAIN: General reset USER[ 003 002 ]

0

1

0: don't execute 1: execute

1: execute

MAIN: Reset LED 306 020

≥1

U-16 General reset, resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the front panel LCD (This diagram replaces figure 3-60 in the operating manual for version -610)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-35

Page 38: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

0

1

0: don't execute 1: execute

&

MAIN: Groupreset 1 EXT[ * ]

≥1

m out of n

LOC: Fct. reset key

[ 005 251 ]

OP_RC: Reset record.EXT [005 213]

m out of n

MAIN: Fct.assign.reset 1

[ * ]

MAIN: Group reset 1 USER

[ * ]

MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 1005 248 005 249

MAIN: Group reset 1 EXT 005 209 005 252

MAIN: Group reset 1 USER 005 253 005 254

x

1 2

LOC: Reset key active

310 024 & ≥1 OP_RC: Reset record.EXT[ 005 213 ]

12Z61RMB_EN

OP_RC: Reset record.EXT [005 213]

U-17 "CLEAR" key on the front panel HMI and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data recording (e.g. as an example for the reset signal O P _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T ); further examples for resetting signals generated in this way are:

− [005 210] MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT − [005 211] MAIN: Reset IP,max,st. EXT − [005 240] MT_RC: Reset record. EXT − [005 241] OL_RC: Reset record. EXT − [005 243] FT_RC: Reset record. EXT − [005 255] MAIN: General reset EXT − [006 075] f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT − [006 076] MEASI: Reset Tmax EXT − [035 182] V/f: Reset replica EXT − [036 087] MEASI: Reset output EXT − [039 122] THRM1: Reset replica EXT − [036 158] CTS: Reset latching EXT − [039 182] THRM2: Reset replica EXT − [040 015] OUTP: Reset latch. EXT − [040 138] MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT − [065 001] MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-36

Page 39: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.7 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Groups CBF_1 to CBF_4)

As of version P63x -611 the new version of the circuit breaker failure protection function, identical with all Px3x protection devices, has been implemented. Depending on the design version this function group is repeatedly available so that a dedicated function may be applied to each end on the protected object.

P631: CBF_1 and CBF_2 P632: CBF_1 and CBF_2 P633: CBF_1 to CBF_3 P634: CBF_1 to CBF_4

The following specifications apply to assigning these 4 functions to the physical measured current values and the internal logical signals.

Assigning ends The currents to be monitored by the respective CBF function may be selected using setting parameters:

Address Description Range of Values Units

022.156 CBF_1 Select. meas. input End a End b End c End d Current summation

022.157 CBF_2 Select. meas. input

022.158 CBF_3 Select. meas. input

022.162 CBF_4 Select. meas. input

Assigning CBs Each CBF_x function is permanently assigned to the respective circuit breakers CBx. This concerns monitoring of the CB contact positions in conjunction with the MAIN function of the protection unit. There are no specifications concerning the assignment of circuit breakers to ends on the protected object.

Assigning the trip command

Which of the trip commands is to be used as a start criterion for the respective CBF function may be selected by setting parameter:

Address Description Range of Values Units

022.202 CBF_1 Fct.assign. starting MAIN Gen. trip signal 1MAIN Gen. trip signal 2MAIN Gen. trip signal 3MAIN Gen. trip signal 4

022.216 CBF_2 Fct.assign. starting

022.230 CBF_3 Fct.assign. starting

022.244 CBF_4 Fct.assign. starting

The functional range made available by the circuit breaker failure protection function CBF_1 is documented in the following description. Function groups CBF_2 to CBF_4 provide the same functional range.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-37

Page 40: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

However, after release of the device software version -611 the following dependencies between functions have been identified:

The following limitation in setting timer stages (bug fixed as of version -620) is present in software versions -611 and -611-71x:

In function groups CBF_2 to CBF_4 the parameter "Delay/fault beh. CB" (addresses 022 227, 022 240 and 022 254) cannot be set to 'Blocked'. It is not possible to completely switch off this sub-function. This does not cause a problem regarding protection functionality as, firstly, the same effect is achieved by setting a timer stage with a delay time of 100 s and, secondly, the signal "Fault behind CB" may be ignored by not using it.

Only with version -611 the following links exist for timer stages 't1 3p' and 't2' (bug fixed as of version -611-716):

� Timer stages C B F _ 2 : t 1 3 p ; C B F _ 3 : t 1 3 p ; C B F _ 4 : t 1 3 p are processed as 'blocked' if C B F _ 1 : t 1 3 p is set to 'Blocked'.

� Timer stages C B F _ 2 : t 2 ; C B F _ 3 : t 2 ; C B F _ 4 : t 2 are processed as 'blocked' if C B F _ 1 : t 2 is set to 'Blocked' .

� If these timer stages in CBF_1 are not set to 'Blocked' the timer stages in CBF_2 to CBF_4 will be processed as set. If 'Blocked' has been selected for this setting then a delay time of 655.35 s will become effective.

Note: In the default setting, these timer stages are not set to 'Blocked' so that the above links will have no effect. However, should a timer stage in CBF_1 be set to 'Blocked' and should this function later be disabled and de-configured, then the setting 'Blocked' will remain effective as described above.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-38

Page 41: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Disabling or enabling the CBF function

The activation of the function is enabled at C B F : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . If this enabling function has been activated, CBF can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The front panel HMI and the binary signal inputs have equal priority in this regard. If only the function C B F _ 1 : E n a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then CBF will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the parameter C B F _ 1 : D i s a b l e E X T has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.

64Z1101 A_EN

U x1

U x2

U x3

U xx

Address 038 042

CBF_1: Enable EXT [ 038 041 ]

CBF_1: Disable EXT[ 038 042 ]

Address 038 041

INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx

[ xxx xxx ]

CBF_1: General enable USER

[ 022 080 ]

0

0: No1: Yes

1

CBF_1: Enable USER

[ 003 016 ]

0: Don't execute1: Execute

CBF_1: Disable USER

[ 003 015 ]

0: Don't execute1: Execute

CBF_1: Ext./user enabled [ 038 040 ]

CBF_1: General enable . [ 040 055 ]

0

1

0

1

U-18 Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-39

Page 42: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Readiness of circuit breaker protection

Circuit breaker failure protection will not be available should one of the following conditions be met:

� The CBF function is not activated.

� Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal input.

� All CBF timer stages have been set to 'Blocked'.

CBF_1: Enabled[ 040 055 ]

CBF_1: Not Ready[ 040 025 ]

CBF_1: Blocking EXT[ 038 058 ]

CBF_1: t2[ 022 166 ]

CBF_1: Delay/Starting Trig.[ 022 155 ]

CBF_1: Delay/Fault Beh. CB[ 022 171 ]

CBF_1: Delay/CB Sync.Superv[ 022 172 ]

CBF_1: t1 3p[ 022 165 ]

64Z1102 B_UK

Blocked

Blocked

Blocked

Blocked

Blocked

&

&

CBF_1: Ready[ 038 009 ]

U-19 CBF readiness

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-40

Page 43: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Detecting a CB tripping A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB tripping.

Protection functions that have triggering criteria not directly dependent on current flow (e.g. V<>), may additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts for evaluation.

Current flow monitoring This function is used to detect a break in current flow safely, immediately and pole selectively. The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values from the selected end with the set threshold value C B F : I < . As long as current flow criteria are met the phase-selective signals C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w A , C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w B , C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w C and the multiple signal C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w P h x will be continuously issued.

CBF_1: I<

[ 022 160 ]

>1

64Z1103 B_UK

CBF_1: Current Flow A[ 038 230 ] IA

IB

IC

CBF_1: Current Flow B[ 038 231 ]CBF_1: Current Flow C[ 038 232 ]CBF_1: Current Flow Phx[ 038 233 ]

U-20 Current flow monitoring

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-41

Page 44: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Evaluation of CB status signals

Trip signals included in the general trip command which use status signals provided by the CB auxiliary contacts in addition to current flow monitoring, can be selected with the parameter C B F _ 1 : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x .

Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available. The P63x can check the following CB status signals for plausibility and evaluate them:

� The 'Open' signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B o p e n 3 p E X T

� The 'Closed' signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B x c l o s e d 3 p E X T

Note: Each circuit breaker CBx is permanently assigned to the respective CBF_x functions. P631+P632: x = 1, 2; P633: x = 1, 2, 3; P634: x = 1, 2, 3, 4.

The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked, if the configuration of the respective binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. This will result in the P63x issuing the signal C B F : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b l e . Evaluation of current criteria is not affected by this blocking.

If only one of the two possible CB status signals has been configured, then this configured signal will always be considered plausible by the P63x.

As an alternative the status signals from the external device (as of version -620) may be used by the P632 and P633. (See section 2.6.4 'Coupling between control and protection for the CB signals'.) Assigning necessary for this is carried out with the parameters M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x o p e n or M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x c l o s e d . Status signals from external devices are processed similar to CB status signals M A I N : C B x o p e n 3 p E X T and M A I N : C B x c l o s e d 3 p E X T . (P632: x = 1, 2; P633: x = 1, 2, 3.)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-42

Page 45: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

&

MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT[ * ]

INP: Fct. U xxx Assign

[ xxx yyy ]

U x01

U x02

U x03

U xxx

Address 031 028

Address 036 051

MAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT[ * ]

&

&

& CBF_x: CB Pos. Implausible[ * ]

64Z7031 B_UK

031 028MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT

MAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT

x: 1

036 051

031 046

x: 2

036 230

031 047

x: 3

036 231

031 048

x: 4

036 232

CBF_x: CB Pos. Implausible 038 210 043 086 043 116 043 146

U-21 Plausibility check of CB status signals

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-43

Page 46: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Startup criteria The startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is recognized as closed during a start criterion. The following startup criteria are evaluated:

� Internal startup criterion: Generating the specific general trip signal, which has been selected by setting parameter C B F _ 1 : F c t . a s s i g n . s t a r t i n g , is considered a startup criterion. In addition it may be selected, by setting the parameter C B F _ 1 : S t a r t w i t h m a n . t r i p , that a manual trip signal will also be used as a startup criterion.

� External startup criterion: Triggering by a protection device operating in parallel (C B F _ 1 : S t a r t 3 p E X T ) may be used as a startup criterion. To be on the safe side an additional two pole triggering may be implemented by applying the signal C B F _ 1 : S t a r t e n a b l e E X T .

In any case, current flow monitoring is the preferred (primary) monitoring criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts are only evaluated when no current flow is registered and the respective trip signal, included in the general trip command, has been selected from the protection function in parameter C B F _ 1 : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x for the evaluation of the CB auxiliary contacts.

Note: With the implementation of software version -611 the startup criterion could disappear when the assigned general trip signal or the external startup criterion dropped out. This happened independently of current flow criteria and CB status signal criteria. The startup criterion has been modified as of software version -620. After a CBF startup has occurred the status of the general trip signal or the external startup signal are now no longer considered. Therefore CBF will drop out only when the current criterion (current flow is below I< in all three phases) is met or when the CB status is identified as open.

Timers and tripping logic Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.

� The signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p s i g n a l t 1 will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time delay, set at timer stage C B F _ 1 : t 1 3 p , has elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil.

� The signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p s i g n a l t 2 will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time delay, set at timer stage C B F _ 1 : t 2 , has elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit breaker or protection system.

These trip signals will be issued as long as the startup criteria are met.

Should a loss of gas pressure occur in the explosion chambers of installed type SF6 circuit breakers then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately tripped without waiting for a reaction from the damaged switch. In case of an external CB_ 1 fault the elapsing of timer stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal to the binary signal input appropriately configured at C B F _ 1 : C B f a u l t y E X T .

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-44

Page 47: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Signal 1Signal 2

Signal n

CBF_1: CB Pos.Implausible[ 038 210 ]

IA

IB

IC

MAIN: CB1 Closed 3p[ 031 042 ]

MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 1[ 036 005 ]

MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 2[ 036 023 ]

MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 3[ 036 108 ]

MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 4[ 036 109 ]

MAIN: Trip Cmd.Blocked[ 021 013 ]

MAIN: Man. Aus Signal [ 034 017 ]

CBF_1: Start Enable EXT[ 038 209 ]CBF_1: Start 3pEXT[ 038 206 ]

CBF_1: Fct.Assignm. CBAux.

[ 022 159 ]

m out of n

Selected signals

CBF_1: I<

[ 022 160 ]

&

>1

1

1

1S

R

&

&

>1

U x01

U x02

U x03

U xnn

Address 038 209

Gen Trip Signal 1

Gen Trip Signal 2

Gen Trip Signal 3

Gen Trip Signal 4

>1

&

&

>1

INP: Fct. U xxx Assign

[ xxx yyy ]

CBF_1: Start with Man.Trip

[ 022 154 ]

0 1

&

& >1 &

&

& >1

0: No1: Yes

>1

INP: Fct.Assign. Starting

[ 022 202 ]

&

&

&

&

>1

CBF_1: Startup 3p[ 038 211 ]

64Z1104 B_UK

U-22 Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection in software version -611

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-45

Page 48: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

CBF_1: Fct. Assignm. CBAux.

[ 022 159 ]

m out of n Signal 1

Signal 2Signal n

Selected signals

CBF_1: I<

[ 022 160 ]

IA

CBF_1: CB Pos.Implausible[ 038 210 ]

1 1

1S

R

INP: Fct. U xxx Assign

[ xxx yyy ]

U x01

U x02

U x03

U xnn

Address 038 209 CBF_1: Start Enable EXT [ 038 209 ]CBF_1: Start 3pEXT [ 038 206 ]

CBF_1: Start with Man.Trip

[ 022 154 ]

0

1

MAIN: Manual Trip Signal [ 034 017 ]

MAIN: Trip Cmd.Blocked[ 021 013 ]

64Z1104 C_UK

0: No 1: Yes

CBF_1: Startup 3p[ 038 211 ]

IB

IC

CBF_1: Fct. Assign. Starting

[ 022 202 ]

MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 1[ 036 005 ]

MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 2[ 036 023 ]

MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 3[ 036 108 ]

MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 4[ 036 109 ]

1

1

1S

R

Gen Trip Signal 1

Gen Trip Signal 2

Gen Trip Signal 3

Gen Trip Signal 4

MAIN: CB1 Open 3p EXT[ 031 028 ]

MAIN: CB1 Closed 3p EXT[ 036 051 ]

&

&

&

&

& &

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

&&

U-23 Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection in software version -620

U-46 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 49: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

64Z1105 B_UK

C

t 0

CBF_1: Not Ready[ 040 025 ]

CBF_1: Startup 3p[ 038 211 ]

CBF_1: Trip Signal t1[ 038 215 ]

CBF_1: Trip Signal t2[ 038 219 ]

CBF_1: CB Faulty EXT[ 038 234 ]

CBF_1: t1 3p

[ 022 165 ]

C

t 0

CBF_1: t2

[ 022 166 ]

CBF_1: CB Failure[ 036 017 ] &

U-24 Timer stages of the circuit breaker failure protection

Trip commands While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages available the user can set minimum time delays for trip commands.

By appropriate setting it can further be determined that trip commands, issued by the CB failure protection, will operate in latching mode. The respective trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.

CBF_1: Trip Signal t1[ 038 215 ]

CBF_1: Trip Command t1[ 038 220 ] &

MAIN: Latch. Trip c Reset[ 040 139 ]

t 0

CBF_1: Min.Dur. Trip Cmd.t1

[ 022 167 ]

1

1

1S

R

MAIN: Trip Cmd.Blocked[ 021 013 ]

CBF_1: Latching Trip Cmd.t1

[ 022 169 ]

&0

1

0: No 1: Yes

>1

>1

CBF_1: Trip Signal t2[ 038 219 ]

CBF_1: Trip Command t2[ 038 224 ] & t 0

CBF_1: Min.Dur. Trip Cmd.t2

[ 022 168 ]

1

1

1S

R

CBF_1: Latching Trip Cmd.t2

[ 022 170 ]

&0

1

0: No 1: Yes

>1

>1

64Z1106 B_UK

U-25 Trip commands, issued by the CB failure protection

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-47

Page 50: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Starting trigger Should a downstream CB fail, a trip can be issued by the CB failure protection function. In this case the dedicated general interrogation is checked as a condition so as to guarantee increased security against overreaction.

The signal C B F _ 1 : S t a r t i n g will be issued when the signal C B F _ 1 : S t a r t i n g t r i g . E X T is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a general starting is present. The signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p s i g n a l will be issued after timer stage C B F _ 1 : D e l a y / s t a r t i n g t r i g . has elapsed.

tMAIN: General Start[ 036 000 ]

CBF_1: Starting Trig. EXT [ 038 016 ]

CBF_1: Trip Signal[ 040 026 ]

CBF_1: Starting[ 038 021 ]

CBF_1: Delay/Starting Trig.

[ 022 155 ]

0

64Z1107 B_UK

&

U-26 Starting trigger

Fault behind CB protection A fault behind a CB (downstream) is a fault that may occur between a circuit breaker already open and a CT, which is fed from the remote end.

Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion, if the circuit breaker does not provide a signal from its auxiliary contacts that it is closed after the time delay set at C B F _ 1 : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B has elapsed.

When such a fault behind CB is recognized the signal C B F _ 1 : F a u l t b e h i n d C B is issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an InterMiCOM teleprotection interface. This may also prevent an unwanted triggering of the circuit breaker failure function.

64Z1108 C_UK

t 0 CBF_1: Fault behind CB[ 038 225 ]

CBF_1: Delay/Fault Beh. CB [ 022 171 ] CBF_1: I<

[ 022 160 ]

CBF_1: CB Pos. Implausible[ 038 210 ]

MAIN: CB1 Open 3p EXT[ 031 028 ]

MAIN: CB1 Closed 3p EXT[ 036 051 ]

IA

IB

IC

&

&

U-27 Fault behind CB protection

U-48 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 51: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

CB synchronization supervision

CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker contacts are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and evaluation of CB status signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge CB operate times the time delay C B F _ 1 : D e l a y / C B s y n c . s u p e r v can be used. When this time delay has elapsed the signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p S i g C B s y n c . s u p e r is issued. Poles that are recognized as being 'open' will still be signaled.

64Z1109 C_UK

t 0

CBF_1: Delay/CB Sync.Superv[ 022 172 ]

CBF_1: I<

[ 022 160 ]

CBF_1: CB Pos. Implausible[ 038 210 ]MAIN: CB1 Open 3p EXT[ 031 028 ]MAIN: CB1 Closed 3p EXT[ 036 051 ]

<3

IA

IB

IC

&

&

&

&

&

CBF_1: TripSig CBsync.Super[ 038 226 ]

CBF_1: CBsync.Superv C Open[ 038 229 ]

CBF_1: CBsync.Superv B Open[ 038 228 ]

CBF_1: CBsync.Superv A Open[ 038 227 ]

U-28 CB synchronization supervision

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-49

Page 52: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.8 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function Groups DEV01 to DEV03) – (P632, P633 only)

The P63x is designed to control up to 3 switchgear units. The Bay Panel defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units.

Defining a bay type With the selection of a Bay type, the following definitions are made:

� Manually operated switchgear units with status signals to be processed.

� Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P63x.

� The bay interlock conditions for the 'Open' / 'Close' command control of the switchgear units, for operation with or without the station interlock function.

When a Bay type is selected, the binary inputs for switchgear status signals and the output relays for control commands are configured automatically if M A I N : A u t o ­a s s i g n m e n t I / O is set to 'Yes'. If set to 'No', the user will need to carry out this configuration. The list of Bay types in the Appendix shows which binary inputs and output relays have been assigned signals or commands for control of switchgear units in the case of automatic configuration.

Setting options for the P63x and the different possibilities to integrate a switchgear unit into the functional sequence of the P63x (processing of status signals only or controlling and signaling) will be explained below, using one switchgear unit as an example. Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in this example. If a signal is identified in the function diagrams by function group "C O M M 1 :" with a blank address [--- ---], it will indicate that it is a signal to or from the communication interface and that it has not been assigned an address. Signals listed in the function diagrams as ‘signal 1’ to ‘signal n’ are specified in the configuration tables of the Address List.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-50

Page 53: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.8.1 Processing Status Signals from a Manually Operated Switchgear Unit (P632, P633 only)

The status signals ‘Open’ and ‘Closed’ are assigned to binary signal inputs. The signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see section ‘Main Functions of the P63x’) are used for further processing. If no logic value of ' 1 ' is present at any of the two binary signal inputs, the running time monitoring function is started. For the duration of the set time delay for running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position - either ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ - the signal ‘Intermediate position’ is issued.

If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is in the intermediate position. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated status is signaled.

The signal 'Faulty Pos.' is issued if the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their 'Open' or 'Closed' position after the set time delay for running time monitoring and the delay time set in M A I N : D e l a y M a n . O p . S u p e r v . have elapsed. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time delay has elapsed and there is no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.

Switch truck For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of ' 1 '.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-51

Page 54: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-29 Processing status signals from a manually operated switchgear unit

U-52 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 55: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.8.2 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units – (P632, P633 only)

Local or remote control of external devices

Usually, remote control of external devices is carried out via the communication interface and local control via appropriately configured function keys on the front panel HMI. Moreover, switchgear units can be controlled via binary inputs configured appropriately (configuration via D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r l . o p e n or D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r . c l o s e ). The setting at M A I N : E l e c t r i c a l c o n t r o l determines whether the inputs function as remote or local control points.

Dependent on the respective position of control the P63x will issue the following logic state signals:

� M A I N : C m d . f r . c o m m . i n t e r f

or

� M A I N : C o m m a n d f r o m H M I

or

� M A I N : C m d . f r . e l e c t r . c t r l

Additionally the following state signals are issued and entered into the operating data memory:

� D E V x x : O p e n c m d . r e c e i v e d

� D E V x x : C l o s e c m d . r e c e i v e d

Selecting the switchgear unit to be controlled and generating a switching request

The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is sent to this selected switchgear unit. This can be carried out via the front panel HMI using the selection key and pressing the ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ key to generate the switching request. (It should be noted that the front panel HMI on the P63x does not feature specific keys for switching functions. If at this point mention of a “selection key” is made, then this would be a function key to which a specific function has been assigned – in this example M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y . (See section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx, particularly as control keys'.)

For control via binary inputs, the appropriate control inputs need to be configured for switchgear units selected to be controlled. For control via the communication interface, the control commands ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ will also address the switchgear unit to be controlled.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-53

Page 56: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

12Z62AAA_EN

MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf[ 221 101 ]

DEV01: Open cmd.received[ 218 000 ]

DEV01: Close cmd.received[ 218 001 ]

COMM1: Open Command DEV01[ --- --- ]

COMM1: Close Command DEV01[ --- --- ]

DEV01: Latching time elaps.

307 012

DEV01: Latching time runn.

307 011

DEV01: Open request

307 000

DEV01: Close request

307 001

DEV01: End open command

307 002

DEV01: End close command

307 003

MAIN: End command 306 028

DEV01: Latching time

[ 210 005 ]

DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close

[ 210 020 ]

Selected signal

Selected signal

DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open

[ 210 019 ]

Signal 1

Signal 2

Signal 3

Signal n

MAIN: Electricalcontrol[ 221 061 ]2: Local

1: Remote

MAIN: Interlockequ. viol.[ 221 018 ]

LOC: Loc.acc. block.active[ 221 005 ]

LOC: Return t. illum. trg

305 550

LOC:Rem.acc.block.active[ 221 004 ]

DEV01

U-30 Generating a switching request with remote control via the communication interface

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-54

Page 57: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Enabling switching commands

Before a switching command is executed, the P63x checks the interlocking conditions defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching command is permitted or not. Bay interlock conditions for operation with or without the station interlock function can be defined. The assignment of an output relay from the interlocking logic to a switching command determines the interlocking conditions that define, for example, the conditions for the 'Open' command for operation without the station interlock function.

U-31 Assignment of equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands and enabling of switching commands by the bay interlock function

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-55

Page 58: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Bay interlock for operation with the station interlock function

For the station interlock function conditions to be interrogated, there needs to be a communication link with the substation control level. If the P63x detects a communication error or if there is no communication interface available, there will be an automatic switch to bay interlock without the station interlock function.

If there is to be a check on the bay interlock and the station interlock function, the bay interlock will be checked first. If bay interlocking issues a switching enable, a switching request will be sent to the substation control level. At substation control level, there will then be a check – taking into account the station interlock functions – as to whether switching is permitted or not. If the substation control level also issues an enabling command, the switching operation is carried out provided that the enable from the bay interlock is still present. Optionally, the ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ switching operation can be carried out without checking the station interlock function conditions. In this case, the bay interlock conditions defined for operation without station interlock functions will be considered.

U-32 Enabling of switching commands by the station interlock

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-56

Page 59: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Linking protection commands to switching commands

For circuit breakers, the ‘Open’ command can be linked to the protection trip signals. The 'Close' command can also be linked to the close command of the protection functions. The Bay Panel defines which of the switchgear units are circuit breakers. The trip (open) or close commands of the protection functions are executed directly without a check of the interlocking conditions.

U-33 Linking to the protection commands

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-57

Page 60: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Issuing switching commands

Dependent on the operating mode (set at D E V x x : O p e r . m o d e c m d . ) set for commands, switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or according to time control.

External termination control If the operating mode time control was selected it is possible to intervene in the control process of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts. It will then be necessary to set the P63x at M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . to 'Yes' and binary signal inputs must be configured so they can be connected to the external termination contacts.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-58

Page 61: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

63Z70AGA_UK

MAIN: Device On-Line[ 003 030 ]1: No (= off)

DEV01: Open Command[ 210 028 ]

DEV01: Protectiontrip cmd.

307 013

DEV01: Enable SI Open

307 004

DEV01: Oper. Mode Cmd.[ 210 024 ]

DEV01: Close Command[ 210 029 ]

MAIN: Enable Control [ 221 058 ]

MAIN: Type of Bay[ 221 001 ]

DEV01: Enable BI Open

307 019

DEV01: Openrequest

307 000

DEV01: Enable SI Close

307 005

DEV01: Enable BI Close

307 020

DEV01: Close request

307 001

DEV01: Protect. close cmd.

307 014

1: Long command

2: Short command

3: Time control

MAIN: Cmd. Dur.Long Cmd.[ 221 230 ]

MAIN: Cmd. Dur. Short Cmd.[ 221 231 ]

1

2

3

U-34 Issuing of switching commands

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-59

Page 62: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Time control of switching commands

As the switching command ends, running time monitoring for the switchgear unit is started. The P63x expects a status signal – ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ – to be issued by the switchgear unit within the duration of the set time delay for running time monitoring. The status signal for the position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at appropriately configured binary inputs on the P63x, which can be set to debouncing and chatter suppression mode (see description for Debouncing and Chatter Suppression in section 'Main Functions of the P63x'). For the duration of the set time delay for running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position - either ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ - the signal ‘Intermediate position’ is issued.

If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is in the intermediate position. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated status is signaled.

If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ position after the set time delay for running time monitoring has elapsed the signal 'Faulty position' is issued. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time delay has elapsed and there is no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.

If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'No’) the switching command is terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ position status signal is received or the set time delay for running time monitoring has elapsed (see Figure U-30).

If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'Yes’) the switching command is terminated, after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination command is issued while the set time delay for running time monitoring is active.

Switch truck For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of ' 1 '.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-60

Page 63: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

12Z51AKB_UK

Debouncing &

Chatter suppression

0: Intermediate pos. 1: Open2: Closed 3: Faulty position

Selected signal

Signal 1

Signal 2

Signal 3

Signal n

Disabled

DEV01: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 031 ]

DEV01: Gr. Assign. Debounc.

[ 210 011 ]

DEV01: Open Signal EXT [ 210 030 ]

DEV01: Open Command [ 210 028 ]DEV01: CloseCommand[ 210 029 ]

DEV01: Startrunn.time mon.

307 008

DEV01: Inp.Asg. Sw.Tr. Plug

[ 210 014 ]

DEV01: Interm. Pos. Suppr.[ 210 012 ]

0: No

1: Yes

Selected group

0: No 1: Yes

0

1

0

1

R1

S1 1

R1

S1 1

R1

S1 1

DEV01: Op.Time Switch. Dev.[ 210 004 ]

DEV01: Stat. Ind.Interm.Pos.

[ 210 027 ]

DEV01: Switch. Device Open[ 210 036 ]

DEV01: Switch.Device Closed[ 210 037 ]

DEV01: Dev. Interm./Flt.Pos[ 210 038 ]

0

1

2

3

0 ... 3

DEV01: End Open Command

307 002

DEV01: End Close Command

307 003

DEV01: Switch. Device runn.

307 010

DEV01: Control State [ 210 018 ]

C

U-35 Monitoring of switching commands

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-61

Page 64: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Time monitoring without external run-back of command, example for switching operation close

1

3

4

210 036

DEV01: Switch. device open

210 037

DEV01: Switch. device closed

1

3

4

10 ms

DEV01: Latching time

DEV01: Op.time switch. dev.

210 005

210 004

19Z5201A_EN

DEV01: Close command 210 029

U-36 Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-62

Page 65: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-63

Time monitoring with external run-back of command, example for switching operation close

1

3

10 ms

DEV01: Latching time 210 005

19Z5202A_EN

DEV01:Inp.asg. end Close

210 016

1

3

210 036

DEV01: Switch. device open

210 037

DEV01: Switch. device closed

DEV01: Close command 210 029

U-37 Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control

Page 66: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Monitoring the number of CB operations permitted

The maximum number of CB operations within a specific time delay may be set with parameter M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p . Associated with this parameter is the counter at M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p . to which the maximum number of CB operations permitted is assigned as soon as the positive edge of an event is present that has been selected by a '1 out of n' parameter at M A I N : C B 1 r e a d y f c t . a s s i g n .

The number of CB operations permitted, set with the counter at M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p . are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation. Operation of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e o p e n and D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e c l o s e d .

The counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . may only be decremented to a value of 1. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way effect the protection or control functionality, in particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB fault has occurred (i.e. M A I N : C B 1 f a u l t y E X T is set to 'Yes') the counter M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . is immediately set to 1.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-64

Page 67: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.9 Interlocking Logic (Function group ILOCK) - (P632, P633 only)

Commands issued to electrically controllable switchgear units within the bay are only enabled after a check of the interlock conditions has been carried out. Interlock conditions are defined in the interlocking logic by Boolean equations.

With the selection of a bay type the bay interlock conditions are defined automatically for the 'Open' and 'Close' commands to control switchgear units within the bay. Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without station interlock (see 'List of Bay Types' in the Appendix). These interlock conditions, defined automatically with the selection of a bay type, can always be modified to system requirements by the user. The following signals acquired by the P63x can be logically linked for the bay interlock.

� Function blocks 1 and 2

� The output signals from the programmable logic function

� The status signals, conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression, from switchgear units

� The status signals, conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression, from single-pole signals

A maximum of 32 equations, each with 32 equation elements, are available to define the interlock conditions. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’. The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher ordinal number equation as an input signal thus leading to a set of interlinked Boolean equations.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-65

Page 68: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-38 Interlock logic shown in the example for equation 1

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-66

Page 69: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.10 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1) - (P632, P633 only)

Commands may be transmitted to the P63x via the communications interface. When the P63x receives such a command, and the remote control mode is enabled, an appropriately configured output relay will be triggered and a signal will be issued.

The operating mode may be selected individually for each single-pole command. The following operating mode settings are available:

� Long Command

� Short Command

� Persistent Command

If the operating mode 'long' or 'short' command has been selected the output relay will be triggered for the time delay set at M A I N : C m d . d u r . l o n g c m d . or M A I N : C m d . d u r . s h o r t c m d .

The setting possibilities and the functional sequence is displayed in the example for Command C001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole commands.

U-39 Functional sequence for single-pole commands in the example for Command C001

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-67

Page 70: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

2.11 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1) - (P632, P633 only)

Binary single-pole signals issued by the system and presented to appropriately configured binary inputs can be transmitted by the P63x to the control station.

A binary input signal is conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see section ‘Main Functions of the P63x’). Such a conditioned signal is available as a logic signal at S I G _ 1 : L o g i c s i g n a l S x x x .

The signaling behavior over the communication interface is defined by the setting of the operating mode. The following operating mode settings are available:

� Without Function

� Start/End Signal

� Transient Signal

If 'Without function' has been set then no message will be sent when the state at the binary signal input changes. If 'Start/End Signal' has been set then a message will be sent any time the state at the binary signal input changes. The 'Start Signal' must remain at logic ' 1 ' for the set minimum time in order to be accepted and sent with the message. If 'Transient Signal' has been set then messages will only be sent when the state at the binary signal input changes from logic ' 0 ' to logic ' 1 '

The following diagram shows setting options and the functional sequence in the example for Signal S001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole signals.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-68

Page 71: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

U-40 Functional sequence for single-pole commands in the example for Signal S001

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-69

Page 72: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

3 Design

3.1 Detachable HMI

Application As a further option in the model versions P631 to P634 there is now (as of version -611) a variant available that includes a detachable HMI. This variant is especially designed for applications where protection and control units are directly installed into bay panels situated in medium-voltage substations and, because of structural constraints, there is only limited space available. The detachable HMI with its small dimensions may be fitted here in a convenient spot and at an ergonomic height.

Detachable HMI Configuration and operation of the protection and control unit is carried out from the integrated front panel user interface (HMI) or via the PC interface on the detachable HMI which is designed in 40TE width. To connect the detachable HMI to the protection and control unit, standard RJ45 cables (Ethernet cable, length max. 10 m) may be used. A 3 m standard RJ45 Ethernet cable is included with the shipment.

A connection to the detachable HMI may be established or separated at any time as the detachable HMI is recognized automatically and completely.

Basic unit For the detachable HMI option, the basic unit is available with case widths of 40TE or 84TE in either a flush-mounted or a surface-mounted case and is provided in several variants for an effortless adaptation to meet local operating conditions. The front plate includes 4 LED indicators for display purposes as well as the RJ45 interface to connect the detachable HMI.

Operation without the detachable HMI

The function of the protection and control unit is fully guaranteed even when the detachable HMI is not connected or the communication link between detachable HMI and the basic unit is interrupted. In such a case the basic unit is accessed via its PC interface. The function parameters for the front panel user interface (HMI) and for LED indicators, available only on the detachable HMI, are automatically hidden in this event.

LED indicators on the detachable HMI

The freely configurable LED indicators H4 to H16 on the detachable HMI offer multi-color function assignment. Separate function assignments for the red and the green LED color indications are available. When both the red and the green LED indicators are simultaneously active the resulting color will be amber (yellow).

Function keys on the detachable HMI

The new detachable HMI provides 6 freely configurable function keys. Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting Actions' as well as in this chapter in section 4.2 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-70

Page 73: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

12Z61TDA

U-41 Basic unit with flush-mounted 40TE case – front view.

12Z61ABA

U-42 Basic unit with flush-mounted 40TE case and detachable HMI – front view The detachable HMI on the basic unit with 84TE case also has a width of 40TE.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6-S // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-71

Page 74: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

49Z6202A

U-43 Detachable HMI – rear view

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-72

Page 75: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

G

GG

G

G

G

G

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

4 User Interface (HMI)

4.1 Display and Keypad

Display and Keypad The front panel user interface (HMI) is fitted with an LCD display containing 4 x 20 alphanumeric characters.

Then there are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the LCD and, with 40TE case (P631, P632, P633) and 84TE case (P632, P633, P634) devices, there are (as of version -611) six additional freely configurable function keys situated to the right of the LCD.

Furthermore the front panel user interface (HMI) is fitted with 17 LED indicators, mounted vertically to the left of the LCD and there are six additional LED indicators situated to the right of the six freely configurable function keys.

Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting Actions' as well as in this chapter in section 4.2 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'

12 Z6100B_EN

H4 H3 H2 H1 H17 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H12 H13 H14 H15 H16

TRIP ALARM OUT OF SERVICE HEALTHY EDIT MODE

C

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

H18

H19

H20

H21

H22

H23

U-44 View of the front panel HMI

P63X/EN AD/Ak6-S // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-73

Page 76: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Availability of the bay panel Only the protection units P632 and P633 provide bay panels under the following conditions:

1. On the hardware side the protection unit has to have been upgraded with a control functionality. This requires that the optional binary I/O module to control switchgear units has been ordered and is fitted to a slot.

2. A further condition is that the protection units are fitted with a communication module with selectable communication protocol or the Ethernet module as well as with the new front panel user interface (HMI) that includes function keys.

3. A bay type has been selected with parameter M A I N : T y p e o f b a y .

Bay panels If available the bay panel will display switching state signals from external devices (closed, open, intermediate position) and the active control site (local or remote). The text display will show up to 3 external devices, one per line, where the external device selected is marked with the flashing ">" symbol to the left of the external devices’ designation text.

X0 :Interm. pos. >Q0 :Interm. pos. Q8 :Interm. pos. Local Locked

U-45 Example of a bay panel

The sequence for external devices is downwards in columns according to their numbering (DEV01, DEV02, DEV03). To designate these external devices there are up to four characters available, and next to these, separated by a colon, their current state is displayed ('Interm. pos.', 'Open', 'Closed' or 'Faulty pos.').

The active control unit ('Remote' or 'Local') is displayed in the fourth line and whether it is 'Locked' or 'Unlocked'.

Keys In addition to the keys documented in the operating manual there are now (as of version -611) six freely configurable function keys available:

� Function keys F1 to F6

By pressing a function key the assigned function is triggered. More details on assigning functions to function keys can be found in section "Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)". More details on handling function keys can be found in this chapter, in section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and in section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-74

Page 77: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

4.2 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)

Function keys available as of version -611

If they have not been configured as control keys, function keys F1 to Fx are enabled only after the password for function keys has been entered.

Exception: If a function key has been configured at M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y the function will only switch from 'Remote' to 'Local' control after the password has been entered, but switching from 'Local' to 'Remote' control will occur without checking the password (see also section 4.3).

It is assumed for the remainder of this section that the function key F1 is enabled only after the password (as assigned at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y 1 ) has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again.

For this example it is further assumed that the password for the function keys is the factory-set password. If the user has changed the password (see the chapter entitled "Changing the Password"), the following description will apply accordingly.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-75

Page 78: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Control Step / Description Control Action

Display

0 Example of a display. Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 A

Curr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A

1 Function key F1 is pressed. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to enter the password.

F1

********

2a Press the following keys in sequence: 'Left'

'Down'

'Right'

'Up’ The display will change as shown in the column on the right.

Now press the ENTER key.

If the correct password has been entered, the active display will re-appear.

Function key F1 is now active for the set return time. (Each function key is protected by its own password, and the return time elapses individually for each function key after the correct password has been entered!

If an invalid password has been entered, the display shown above in Step 1 will appear.

2b This control step can be cancelled at any time by pressing the CLEAR key before the ENTER key is pressed.

C

*

*

*

*

Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 A

Curr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A

Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 A

Curr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A

3 Press F1 again. The function configured to this function key is carried out.

F1 Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 A

Curr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A

4 When function keys are pressed while the return time period of the function key is elapsing, then the configured function is carried out directly, e.g. without again checking for the password.

Fx Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 A

Curr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-76

Page 79: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

4.3 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx, particularly as Control Keys (P632, P633 only)

Function keys as control keys, as of version -620

As described in section "Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)" in Chapter 3 function keys F1 to Fx may be configured as control keys at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6).

In this case different rules apply to checking the password (see the previous section) and the configuration to 'Key/Switch' is ignored.

In case the control functionality is desired then each of the following four control commands, should be assigned to a function key. The particular selection of the four function keys out of the available six, however, does not matter.

• M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y The 'Local/Remote' control command is effective only in the bay panel except where a binary signal input has been configured for this function. Depending on the functionality set at H M I : F c t . A s s i g n . L / R k e y , the 'Local/Remote' command toggles either between 'Remote' and 'Local' control, or between 'Local/Remote' and 'Local' control. (The parameter H M I : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y may be set either to R <-> L or to R & L <-> L and will then define which of the two switching modes is active.) If the 'Local/Remote' command is configured such that it will switch from 'Remote' control to 'Local' control, then this can only occur if the password has first been entered at H M I : P a s s w o r d L / R . Switching from 'Local' to 'Remote' control will occur without checking the password. (See also section "Configuring the Measured Value Panels and Selection of the Control Point (Function Group HMI)".)

• M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y This selection command is effective only in the bay panel and only if 'Local' control is activated. If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the switchgear unit to be controlled. This selected external device is marked on the text display with the flashing symbol ">" in front of the external devices’ designation text.

• M A I N : D e v i c e O P E N k e y The 'OPEN' command is effective in the bay panel only. Pressing the key assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into account the interlock equation – to assume the 'open' status.

• M A I N : D e v i c e C L O S E k e y The CLOSE command is effective in the bay panel only.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-77

Page 80: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

5 Settings

5.1 Parameters

5.1.1 Device Identification

Device DVICE: AFS Order No. 001 000

Order number for the device. This number cannot be altered by the user.

User interface

5.1.2 Configuration Parameters

LOC: Password L/R 221 040

The password used to change the setting from 'Remote' to 'Local' control can be defined here. (Switching from 'Local' to 'Remote' control occurs without checking the password.) LOC: Display L/R 221 070

This setting defines whether the control site – 'Local' or 'Remote' – shall be displayed on the bay panel. LOC: Displ. interl. stat. 221 071

This setting defines whether the 'Locked' or 'Unlocked' status shall be displayed on the bay panel. LOC: Fct. assign. L/R key 225 208

This setting defines whether the (electric) key-operated switch switches between remote / local control (L↔R) or between 'Remote' and 'Local'control / 'Local' control (R&L↔L). LOC: Return time select. 221 030

If the user does not press a key on the front panel user interface (HMI) during this set time period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is cancelled.

Communication interface 1 COMM1: -103 prot. variant 003 178

The user may select either the AREVA D or the VDEW variant of the 103 protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is enabled.

IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Update Measurements 104 229

Time period between two transmissions of all measured value Report Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy. IEC: Dead band IP 104 230

Setting to calculate the filter value for all IP Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the IP measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:

step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d I P

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-78

Page 81: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

IEC: Dead band IN 104 231

Setting to calculate the filter value for all IN Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the IN measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:

step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d I N IEC: Dead band VPP 104 232

Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPP Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the VPP measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:

step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d V P P IEC: Dead band VPG 104 233

Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPG Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the VPG measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:

step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : Dead band VPG IEC: Dead band f 104 234

Setting to calculate the filter value for all f Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the f measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:

step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d f IEC: Dead band P 104 235

Setting to calculate the filter value for all P Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the P measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:

step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d P IEC: Dead band phi 104 236

Setting to calculate the filter value for all φ Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the φ measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:

step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d p h i IEC: Dead band Z 104 237

Setting to calculate the filter value for all Z Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the Z measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:

step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d Z IEC: Dead band min/max 104 238

Setting to calculate the filter value for all min/max Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the min/max measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:

step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d m i n / m a x

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-79

Page 82: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

IEC: Dead band ASC 104 239

Setting to calculate the filter value for all ASC Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the ASC measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:

step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d A S C IEC: Dead band temp. 104 240

Setting to calculate the filter value for all temperature Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the temperature measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:

step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d t e m p . IEC: Dead band 20mA 104 241

Setting to calculate the filter value for all 20mA Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the 20mA measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:

step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d 2 0 m A IEC: DEV control model 221 081

Setting of which control model is to be used to control all external devices. Suggested setting when performing switching operations at maximum safety is SBO enh. Security (SBO = Select-Before-Operate).

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-80

Page 83: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Generic Object Oriented Substation Event

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Applic. ID 108 000

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 Applic. ID 108 010

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 Applic. ID 108 020

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 Applic. ID 108 030

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 Applic. ID 108 040

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 Applic. ID 108 050

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 Applic. ID 108 060

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 Applic. ID 108 070

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 Applic. ID 108 080

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 Applic. ID 108 090

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 Applic. ID 108 100

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 Applic. ID 108 110

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 Applic. ID 108 120

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 Applic. ID 108 130

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 Applic. ID 108 140

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 Applic. ID 108 150

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 Applic. ID 110 000

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 Applic. ID 110 010

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 Applic. ID 110 020

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 Applic. ID 110 030

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 Applic. ID 110 040

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 Applic. ID 110 050

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 Applic. ID 110 060

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 Applic. ID 110 070

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 Applic. ID 110 080

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 Applic. ID 110 090

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 Applic. ID 110 100

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 Applic. ID 110 110

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 Applic. ID 110 120

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 Applic. ID 110 130

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 Applic. ID 110 140

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 Applic. ID 110 150

Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Goose ID 108 001

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 Goose ID 108 011

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 Goose ID 108 021

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 Goose ID 108 031

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 Goose ID 108 041

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 Goose ID 108 051

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 Goose ID 108 061

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 Goose ID 108 071

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 Goose ID 108 081

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 Goose ID 108 091

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 Goose ID 108 101

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 Goose ID 108 111

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 Goose ID 108 121

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 Goose ID 108 131

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 Goose ID 108 141

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 Goose ID 108 151

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 Goose ID 110 001

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-81

Page 84: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 Goose ID 110 011

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 Goose ID 110 021

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 Goose ID 110 031

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 Goose ID 110 041

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 Goose ID 110 051

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 Goose ID 110 061

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 Goose ID 110 071

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 Goose ID 110 081

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 Goose ID 110 091

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 Goose ID 110 101

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 Goose ID 110 111

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 Goose ID 110 121

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 Goose ID 110 131

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 Goose ID 110 141

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 Goose ID 110 151

Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. Virtual GOOSE inputs can be linked with interlocking equations of assigned external devices. GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DataSetRef 108 002

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DataSetRef 108 012

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DataSetRef 108 022

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DataSetRef 108 032

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DataSetRef 108 042

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DataSetRef 108 052

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DataSetRef 108 062

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DataSetRef 108 072

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DataSetRef 108 082

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DataSetRef 108 092

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DataSetRef 108 102

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DataSetRef 108 112

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DataSetRef 108 122

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DataSetRef 108 132

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DataSetRef 108 142

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DataSetRef 108 152

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DataSetRef 110 002

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DataSetRef 110 012

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DataSetRef 110 022

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DataSetRef 110 032

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DataSetRef 110 042

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DataSetRef 110 052

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DataSetRef 110 062

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DataSetRef 110 072

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DataSetRef 110 082

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DataSetRef 110 092

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DataSetRef 110 102

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DataSetRef 110 112

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DataSetRef 110 122

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DataSetRef 110 132

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-82

Page 85: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DataSetRef 110 142

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DataSetRef 110 152

'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device (IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then only the first 20 characters are to be entered. GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DataObjInd 108 003

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DataObjInd 108 013

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DataObjInd 108 023

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DataObjInd 108 033

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DataObjInd 108 043

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DataObjInd 108 053

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DataObjInd 108 063

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DataObjInd 108 073

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DataObjInd 108 083

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DataObjInd 108 093

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DataObjInd 108 103

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DataObjInd 108 113

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DataObjInd 108 123

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DataObjInd 108 133

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DataObjInd 108 143

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DataObjInd 108 153

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DataObjInd 110 003

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DataObjInd 110 013

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DataObjInd 110 023

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DataObjInd 110 033

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DataObjInd 110 043

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DataObjInd 110 053

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DataObjInd 110 063

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DataObjInd 110 073

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DataObjInd 110 083

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DataObjInd 110 093

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DataObjInd 110 103

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DataObjInd 110 113

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DataObjInd 110 123

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DataObjInd 110 133

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DataObjInd 110 143

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DataObjInd 110 153

Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. A data object index indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated. GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DatAttrInd 108 004

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DatAttrInd 108 014

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DatAttrInd 108 024

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DatAttrInd 108 034

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DatAttrInd 108 044

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DatAttrInd 108 054

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DatAttrInd 108 064

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-83

Page 86: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DatAttrInd 108 074

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DatAttrInd 108 084

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DatAttrInd 108 094

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DatAttrInd 108 104

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DatAttrInd 108 114

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DatAttrInd 108 124

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DatAttrInd 108 134

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DatAttrInd 108 144

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DatAttrInd 108 154

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DatAttrInd 110 004

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DatAttrInd 110 014

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DatAttrInd 110 024

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DatAttrInd 110 034

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DatAttrInd 110 044

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DatAttrInd 110 054

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DatAttrInd 110 064

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DatAttrInd 110 074

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DatAttrInd 110 084

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DatAttrInd 110 094

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DatAttrInd 110 104

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DatAttrInd 110 114

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DatAttrInd 110 124

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DatAttrInd 110 134

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DatAttrInd 110 144

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DatAttrInd 110 154

Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. A data object index indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated. GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 default 108 005

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 default 108 015

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 default 108 025

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 default 108 035

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 default 108 045

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 default 108 055

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 default 108 065

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 default 108 075

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 default 108 085

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 default 108 095

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 default 108 105

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 default 108 115

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 default 108 125

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 default 108 135

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 default 108 145

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 default 108 155

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 default 110 005

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 default 110 015

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 default 110 025

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 default 110 035

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 default 110 045

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 default 110 055

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 default 110 065

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-84

Page 87: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 default 110 075

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 default 110 085

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 default 110 095

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 default 110 105

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 default 110 115

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 default 110 125

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 default 110 135

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 default 110 145

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 default 110 155

Default for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. The state of a virtual two-pole GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-85

Page 88: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Binary input INP: Filter 010 220 Fig. 3-23

Input filter which is activated when either the mode 'Active "High", Filt.' or 'Active "Low", Filt.' has been selected. In order to suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to set this parameter to 6 [steps]. See Chapter 'Operation' for further information.

Main function

External devices 01 to 03

MAIN: Type of bay 220 001

Configuration of a bay type. MAIN: Customized bay type 221 062

If a user-specific (customized) bay type has been loaded, its bay type number will be displayed. If no customized bay type has been loaded, the number ' 0 ' will be displayed.

DEV01: Function group DEV01 210 047

DEV02: Function group DEV02 210 097

DEV03: Function group DEV03 210 147

Cancelling function groups DEV01 to DEV03 or including them in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. DEV01: Funct. type, signal 210 034

DEV02: Funct. type, signal 210 084

DEV03: Funct. type, signal 210 134

Setting the function type of the signal.

Note:

If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2. DEV01: Inform. No., signal 210 035

DEV02: Inform. No., signal 210 085

DEV03: Inform. No., signal 210 135

Setting the information number of the signal.

Note:

If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN3. DEV01: Funct. type, command 210 032

DEV02: Funct. type, command 210 082

DEV03: Funct. type, command 210 132

Setting the function type of the command.

Note:

If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-86

Page 89: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: Inform. No., command 210 033

DEV02: Inform. No., command 210 083

DEV03: Inform. No., command 210 133

Setting the information number of the command.

Note:

If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN3.

Cancelling function group ILOCK or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.

Interlocking logic ILOCK: Function group ILOCK 250 102

Single-pole commands CMD_1: Function group CMD_1 249 252

Cancelling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. CMD_1: Command C001 config. 200 004

CMD_1: Command C002 config. 200 009

CMD_1: Command C003 config. 200 014

CMD_1: Command C004 config. 200 019

CMD_1: Command C005 config. 200 024

CMD_1: Command C006 config. 200 029

CMD_1: Command C007 config. 200 034

CMD_1: Command C008 config. 200 039

CMD_1: Command C009 config. 200 044

CMD_1: Command C010 config. 200 049

CMD_1: Command C011 config. 200 054

CMD_1: Command C012 config. 200 059

Cancelling commands C001 to C026 or including them in the configuration. If any command is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-87

Page 90: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Single-pole signals SIG_1: Function group SIG_1 249 250

Cancelling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. SIG_1: Signal S001 config. 226 007

SIG_1: Signal S002 config. 226 015

SIG_1: Signal S003 config. 226 023

SIG_1: Signal S004 config. 226 031

SIG_1: Signal S005 config. 226 039

SIG_1: Signal S006 config. 226 047

SIG_1: Signal S007 config. 226 055

SIG_1: Signal S008 config. 226 063

SIG_1: Signal S009 config. 226 071

SIG_1: Signal S010 config. 226 079

SIG_1: Signal S011 config. 226 087

SIG_1: Signal S012 config. 226 095

Cancelling signals S001 to S012 or including them in the configuration. If any signal is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden..

5.1.3 Function Settings

5.1.3.1 Global

Main function MAIN: Time tag 221 098

For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time tag for the signal is to be issued after debouncing or when the first pulse edge is detected. Furthermore it is defined whether entries in the operating data memory are made in chronological order or not. MAIN: Sig. asg. CB1 open 021 017

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB2 open 021 061

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB3 open 021 063

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB4 open 021 065

Definition of the binary signal used by the P63x to evaluate the 'CB open' position signal.

Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output enable. MAIN: Debounce time gr. 1 221 200

MAIN: Debounce time gr. 2 221 203

MAIN: Debounce time gr. 3 221 206

Setting the debouncing time. MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.1 221 201

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.2 221 204

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.3 221 207

Setting the chatter monitoring time.

MAIN: Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl. 221 057

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-88

Page 91: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: Change of state gr.1 221 202

MAIN: Change of state gr.2 221 205

MAIN: Change of state gr.3 221 208

Setting the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter monitoring time before chatter suppression operates. MAIN: Cmd. dur.long cmd. 221 230

Setting the command duration for a long command. MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd. 221 231

Setting the command duration for a short command. MAIN: Inp.asg.interl.deact 221 007

Definition of the binary signal used to deactivate interlocking of control commands for switchgear. MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key sw. 221 008

Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local control. MAIN: Auto-assignment I/O 221 065

When a bay type is selected the binary inputs and outputs, required to control switchgear, are automatically configured with function assignments. MAIN: Electrical control 221 061

This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to control switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control MAIN: Delay Man.Op.Superv. 221 079

After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the signal "Sw. dev. interm. pos." already present and the status signal continuously absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from the respective binary inputs, will be issued. (See also "Processing status signals from manually operated switchgear") MAIN: W. ext. cmd. termin. 221 063

This setting defines whether there is an intervention in the control process of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts. MAIN: Inp.assign. tripping 221 010

Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal. MAIN: Prot.trip>CB tripped 221 012

Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form the CB trip signal. MAIN: Inp. asg. CB trip 221 013

Definition of the binary signal used by the P63x to signal the 'CB open' position signal. MAIN: Sig. asg. CB1 closed 021 020

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB2 closed 021 060

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB3 closed 021 062

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB4 closed 021 064

Definition of the binary signal used by the P63x to evaluate the 'CB closed' position signal.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-89

Page 92: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

MAIN: Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext 221 050

Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an external device. MAIN: Inp.asg. CB trip ext 221 024

Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external device. MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1 221 051

MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2 221 052

Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group signal).

5.1.3.2 General Functions

Single-pole commands CMD_1: Design. command C001 200 000

CMD_1: Design. command C002 200 005

CMD_1: Design. command C003 200 010

CMD_1: Design. command C004 200 015

CMD_1: Design. command C005 200 020

CMD_1: Design. command C006 200 025

CMD_1: Design. command C007 200 030

CMD_1: Design. command C008 200 035

CMD_1: Design. command C009 200 040

CMD_1: Design. command C010 200 045

CMD_1: Design. command C011 200 050

CMD_1: Design. command C012 200 055

Selection of the command designation. CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C001 200 002

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C002 200 007

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C003 200 012

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C004 200 017

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C005 200 022

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C006 200 027

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C007 200 032

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C008 200 037

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C009 200 042

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C010 200 047

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C011 200 052

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C012 200 057

Selection of the command operating mode.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-90

Page 93: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Single-pole signals SIG_1: Designat. sig. S001 226 000

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S002 226 008

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S003 226 016

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S004 226 024

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S005 226 032

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S006 226 040

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S007 226 048

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S008 226 056

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S009 226 064

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S010 226 072

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S011 226 080

SIG_1: Designat. sig. S012 226 088

Selection of the signal designation. SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S001 226 001

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S002 226 009

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S003 226 017

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S004 226 025

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S005 226 033

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S006 226 041

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S007 226 049

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S008 226 057

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S009 226 065

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S010 226 073

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S011 226 081

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S012 226 089

Selection of the signal operating mode. SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S001 226 003

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S002 226 011

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S003 226 019

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S004 226 027

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S005 226 035

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S006 226 043

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S007 226 051

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S008 226 059

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S009 226 067

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S010 226 075

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S011 226 083

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S012 226 091

Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-91

Page 94: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S001 226 002

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S002 226 010

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S003 226 018

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S004 226 026

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S005 226 034

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S006 226 042

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S007 226 050

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S008 226 058

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S009 226 066

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S010 226 074

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S011 226 082

SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S012 226 090

The logic ' 1 ' signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that a telegram can be sent in the "Start/end signal" mode.

5.1.3.3 Setting Groups

Main function MAIN: Vnom prim. end a PSx 019 017 019 057 019 061 019 065

Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end A of the transformer. MAIN: Vnom prim. end b PSx 019 018 019 058 019 062 019 066

Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end B of the transformer. MAIN: Vnom prim. end c PSx 019 019 019 059 019 063 019 067

Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end C of the transformer. MAIN: Vnom prim. end d PSx 019 037 019 060 019 064 019 068

Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end D of the transformer.

5.1.3.4 Control

Main function MAIN: BI active USER 221 003

Selecting the bay interlocking function from the front panel user interface (HMI). MAIN: SI active USER 221 002

Selecting the station interlocking function from the front panel user interface (HMI). MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.1 221 014

MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.2 221 022

Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2. MAIN: Op. delay fct. block 221 029

Setting the operate delay of the function blocks. MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap. 221 084

MAIN: CB2 max. oper. cap. 221 088

Setting the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a limited time period).

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-92

Page 95: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-93

External devices 01 to 03

MAIN: CB1 ready fct.assign 221 085

MAIN: CB2 ready fct.assign 221 089

Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . with the value at M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p .

DEV01: Designat. ext. dev. 210 000

DEV02: Designat. ext. dev. 210 050

DEV03: Designat. ext. dev. 210 100

Setting the designation of the respective external device. DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004

DEV02: Op.time switch. dev. 210 054

DEV03: Op.time switch. dev. 210 104

Setting the operating time for switchgear (switching device). DEV01: Latching time 210 005

DEV02: Latching time 210 055

DEV03: Latching time 210 105

Setting the time that a control command is sustained after a switchgear position signal – "Open" or "Closed" – has been received. DEV01: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 011

DEV02: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 061

DEV03: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 111

Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and chatter suppression. DEV01: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 012

DEV02: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 062

DEV03: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 112

This setting determines whether the 'intermediate position’ signal will be suppressed or not, while the switchgear is operating. DEV01: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 027

DEV02: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 077

DEV03: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 127

This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s delay after the 'Faulty position' signal is issued. DEV01: Oper. mode cmd. 210 024

DEV02: Oper. mode cmd. 210 074

DEV03: Oper. mode cmd. 210 124

Select the operating mode of the command from long command, short command or time control. DEV01: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 014

DEV02: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 064

DEV03: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 114

Definition of the binary signal used to signal the position (plugged-in / unplugged) of the switch truck plug.

Page 96: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 021

DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 071

DEV03: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 121

This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general trip command 1” of the protection function.

Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay type definitions. DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 022

DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 072

DEV03: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 122

This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general trip command 2” of the protection function.

Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay type definitions. DEV01: With close cmd./prot 210 023

DEV02: With close cmd./prot 210 073

DEV03: With close cmd./prot 210 123

This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the "close command" of the protection function.

Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay type definitions. DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 019

DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 069

DEV03: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 119

This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to move the switchgear unit to the open position.

Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be selected. DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 020

DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 070

DEV03: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 120

This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to move the switchgear unit to the 'Closed' position.

Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be selected. DEV01: Inp. asg. end Open 210 015

DEV02: Inp. asg. end Open 210 065

DEV03: Inp. asg. end Open 210 115

This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the 'Open' command.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-94

Page 97: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: Inp. asg. end Close 210 016

DEV02: Inp. asg. end Close 210 066

DEV03: Inp. asg. end Close 210 116

This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the 'Close' command. DEV01: Open w/o stat.interl 210 025

DEV02: Open w/o stat.interl 210 075

DEV03: Open w/o stat.interl 210 125

This setting specifies whether switching to 'Open' position is permitted without a check by the station interlock function. DEV01: Close w/o stat. int. 210 026

DEV02: Close w/o stat. int. 210 076

DEV03: Close w/o stat. int. 210 126

This setting specifies whether switching to 'Closed' position is permitted without a check by the station interlock function. DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 039

DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 089

DEV03: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 139

This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'.

Note:

The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function assignment. DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 040

DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 090

DEV03: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 140

This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'.

Note:

The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function assignment.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-95

Page 98: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 041

DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 091

DEV03: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 141

This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.

Note:

The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function assignment. DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 042

DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 092

DEV03: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 142

This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.

Note:

The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function assignment.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-96

Page 99: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Interlocking logic ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 250 000

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 250 001

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 3 250 002

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 4 250 003

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 5 250 004

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 6 250 005

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 7 250 006

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 8 250 007

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 9 250 008

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.10 250 009

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.11 250 010

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.12 250 011

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.13 250 012

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.14 250 013

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.15 250 014

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.16 250 015

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.17 250 016

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.18 250 017

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.19 250 018

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.20 250 019

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.21 250 020

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.22 250 021

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.23 250 022

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.24 250 023

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.25 250 024

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.26 250 025

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.27 250 026

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.28 250 027

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.29 250 028

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.30 250 029

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.31 250 030

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.32 250 031

Definition of the interlock conditions.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-97

Page 100: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

6 Information and Control Functions

6.1 Healthy

6.1.1 Cyclic Values

6.1.1.1 Physical State Signals

Binary input INP: State U 901 152 144

INP: State U 902 152 147

INP: State U 903 152 150

INP: State U 904 152 153

INP: State U 1001 152 162

INP: State U 1002 152 165

INP: State U 1003 152 168

INP: State U 1004 152 171

INP: State U 1005 152 174

INP: State U 1006 152 177

The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:

� 'Without function': No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.

� 'Low': Not energized.

� 'High': Energized.

This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode set.

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-98

Page 101: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Binary output OUTP: State K 901 150 192

OUTP: State K 902 150 195

OUTP: State K 903 150 198

OUTP: State K 904 150 201

OUTP: State K 905 150 204

OUTP: State K 906 150 207

OUTP: State K 907 150 210

OUTP: State K 908 150 213

OUTP: State K 1001 150 216

OUTP: State K 1002 150 219

OUTP: State K 1003 150 222

OUTP: State K 1004 150 225

OUTP: State K 1005 150 228

OUTP: State K 1006 150 231

OUTP: State K 1007 150 234

OUTP: State K 1008 150 237

The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:

� 'Without function': No functions are assigned to the output relay. � 'Low': The output relay is not energized. � 'High': The output relay is energized.

This display appears regardless of the output relay mode set.

6.1.1.2 Logic State Signals

User interface LOC: Loc.acc.block.active 221 005

LOC: Rem.acc.block.active 221 004

Communication interface 1 COMM1: Buffer overrun 221 100

IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Control reservation 221 082

Display if a client has made a reservation to control an external device ("select" for control by control mode "select before operate").

U-99

Generic Object Oriented Substation Event

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 position 109 000

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 position 109 005

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 position 109 010

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 position 109 015

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 position 109 020

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 position 109 025

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 position 109 030

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 position 109 035

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 position 109 040

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 position 109 045

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 position 109 050

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 position 109 055

Page 102: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 position 109 060

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 position 109 065

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 position 109 070

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 position 109 075

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 position 109 100

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 position 109 105

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 position 109 110

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 position 109 115

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 position 109 120

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 position 109 125

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 position 109 130

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 position 109 135

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 position 109 140

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 position 109 145

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 position 109 150

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 position 109 155

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 position 109 160

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 position 109 165

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 position 109 170

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 position 109 175

State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 open 109 001

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 open 109 006

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 open 109 011

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 open 109 016

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 open 109 021

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 open 109 026

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 open 109 031

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 open 109 036

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 open 109 041

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 open 109 046

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 open 109 051

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 open 109 056

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 open 109 061

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 open 109 066

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 open 109 071

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 open 109 076

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 open 109 101

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 open 109 106

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 open 109 111

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 open 109 116

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 open 109 121

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 open 109 126

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 open 109 131

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 open 109 136

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 open 109 141

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 open 109 146

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 open 109 151

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 open 109 156

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 open 109 161

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 open 109 166

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-100

Page 103: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 open 109 171

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 open 109 176

Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 closed 109 002

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 closed 109 007

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 closed 109 012

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 closed 109 017

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 closed 109 022

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 closed 109 027

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 closed 109 032

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 closed 109 037

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 closed 109 042

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 closed 109 047

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 closed 109 052

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 closed 109 057

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 closed 109 062

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 closed 109 067

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 closed 109 072

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 closed 109 077

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 closed 109 102

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 closed 109 107

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 closed 109 112

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 closed 109 117

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 closed 109 122

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 closed 109 127

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 closed 109 132

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 closed 109 137

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 closed 109 142

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 closed 109 147

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 closed 109 152

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 closed 109 157

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 closed 109 162

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 closed 109 167

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 closed 109 172

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 closed 109 177

Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 interm.pos 109 003

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 interm.pos 109 008

GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 interm.pos 109 013

GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 interm.pos 109 018

GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 interm.pos 109 023

GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 interm.pos 109 028

GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 interm.pos 109 033

GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 interm.pos 109 038

GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 interm.pos 109 043

GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 interm.pos 109 048

GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 interm.pos 109 053

GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 interm.pos 109 058

GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 interm.pos 109 063

GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 interm.pos 109 068

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-101

Page 104: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Main function

GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 interm.pos 109 073

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 interm.pos 109 078

GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 interm.pos 109 103

GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 interm.pos 109 108

GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 interm.pos 109 113

GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 interm.pos 109 118

GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 interm.pos 109 123

GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 interm.pos 109 128

GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 interm.pos 109 133

GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 interm.pos 109 138

GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 interm.pos 109 143

GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 interm.pos 109 148

GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 interm.pos 109 153

GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 interm.pos 109 158

GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 interm.pos 109 163

GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 interm.pos 109 168

GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 interm.pos 109 173

GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 interm.pos 109 178

GOOSE: IED link faulty 107 250

Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.

MAIN: CB1 open 3p EXT 031 028

MAIN: CB2 open 3p EXT 031 046

MAIN: CB3 open 3p EXT 031 047

MAIN: CB4 open 3p EXT 031 048

MAIN: CB1 closed 3p EXT 036 051

MAIN: CB2 closed 3p EXT 036 230

MAIN: CB3 closed 3p EXT 036 231

MAIN: CB4 closed 3p EXT 036 232

MAIN: CB1 faulty EXT 221 086

MAIN: CB2 faulty EXT 221 090

MAIN: Enable control 221 058

MAIN: Bay interlock. act. 221 001

MAIN: Subst. interl. act. 221 000

MAIN: Fct. block. 1 active 221 015

MAIN: Fct. block. 2 active 221 023

MAIN: Interlock equ. viol. 221 018

MAIN: CB tripped 221 016

MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 active 221 017

MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 stored 221 054

MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 active 221 053

MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 stored 221 055

MAIN: Communication error 221 019

MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf 221 101

MAIN: Command from HMI 221 102

MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl 221 103

f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT 006 075 Fig.*: 3-83Over-/ Underfrequency Protection

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-102

Page 105: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

External devices 01 to 03

Interlocking logic

DEV01: Open signal EXT 210 030

DEV01: Closed signal EXT 210 031

DEV01: Control state 210 018

DEV01: Switch. device open 210 036

DEV01: Switch.device closed 210 037

DEV01: Dev. interm./flt.pos 210 038

DEV01: Open command 210 028

DEV01: Close command 210 029

DEV01: Switch. device open 218 000

DEV01: Switch.device closed 218 001

DEV02: Open signal EXT 210 080

DEV02: Closed signal EXT 210 081

DEV02: Control state 210 068

DEV02: Switch. device open 210 086

DEV02: Switch.device closed 210 087

DEV02: Dev. interm./flt.pos 210 088

DEV02: Open command 210 078

DEV02: Close command 210 079

DEV02: Switch. device open 218 002

DEV02: Switch.device closed 218 003

DEV03: Open signal EXT 210 130

DEV03: Closed signal EXT 210 131

DEV03: Control state 210 118

DEV03: Switch. device open 210 136

DEV03: Switch.device closed 210 137

DEV03: Dev. interm./flt.pos 210 138

DEV03: Open command 210 128

DEV03: Close command 210 129

DEV03: Switch. device open 218 004

DEV03: Switch.device closed 218 005

ILOCK: Output 1 250 032

ILOCK: Output 2 250 033

ILOCK: Output 3 250 034

ILOCK: Output 4 250 035

ILOCK: Output 5 250 036

ILOCK: Output 6 250 037

ILOCK: Output 7 250 038

ILOCK: Output 8 250 039

ILOCK: Output 9 250 040

ILOCK: Output 10 250 041

ILOCK: Output 11 250 042

ILOCK: Output 12 250 043

ILOCK: Output 13 250 044

ILOCK: Output 14 250 045

ILOCK: Output 15 250 046

ILOCK: Output 16 250 047

ILOCK: Output 17 250 048

ILOCK: Output 18 250 049

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-103

Page 106: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

ILOCK: Output 19 250 050

ILOCK: Output 20 250 051

ILOCK: Output 21 250 052

ILOCK: Output 22 250 053

ILOCK: Output 23 250 054

ILOCK: Output 24 250 055

ILOCK: Output 25 250 056

ILOCK: Output 26 250 057

ILOCK: Output 27 250 058

ILOCK: Output 28 250 059

ILOCK: Output 29 250 060

ILOCK: Output 30 250 061

ILOCK: Output 31 250 062

ILOCK: Output 32 250 063

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-104

Page 107: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Single-pole commands

Single-pole signals

CMD_1: Command C001 200 001

CMD_1: Command C002 200 006

CMD_1: Command C003 200 011

CMD_1: Command C004 200 016

CMD_1: Command C005 200 021

CMD_1: Command C006 200 026

CMD_1: Command C007 200 031

CMD_1: Command C008 200 036

CMD_1: Command C009 200 041

CMD_1: Command C010 200 046

CMD_1: Command C011 200 051

CMD_1: Command C012 200 056

SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT 226 004

SIG_1: Logic signal S001 226 005

SIG_1: Signal S002 EXT 226 012

SIG_1: Logic signal S002 226 013

SIG_1: Signal S003 EXT 226 020

SIG_1: Logic signal S003 226 021

SIG_1: Signal S004 EXT 226 028

SIG_1: Logic signal S004 226 029

SIG_1: Signal S005 EXT 226 036

SIG_1: Logic signal S005 226 037

SIG_1: Signal S006 EXT 226 044

SIG_1: Logic signal S006 226 045

SIG_1: Signal S007 EXT 226 052

SIG_1: Logic signal S007 226 053

SIG_1: Signal S008 EXT 226 060

SIG_1: Logic signal S008 226 061

SIG_1: Signal S009 EXT 226 068

SIG_1: Logic signal S009 226 069

SIG_1: Signal S010 EXT 226 076

SIG_1: Logic signal S010 226 077

SIG_1: Signal S011 EXT 226 084

SIG_1: Logic signal S011 226 085

SIG_1: Signal S012 EXT 226 092

SIG_1: Logic signal S012 226 093

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-105

Page 108: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

6.1.2 Control and Testing

Measured data input MEASI: Reset Tmax USER 003 045

Resetting of measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9) to the updated measured values.

Measured data output MEASO: Reset output USER 037 116

Resetting the measured data output function.

f<>: Reset meas.val. USER 003 080Over-/ Underfrequency Protection Resetting the measured event values f < > : M a x . f r e q u . f o r f > and

f < > : M i n . f r e q u . f o r f < .

6.2 Fault and Event Records

6.2.1 Event Counters

Main function MAIN: CB1 act. oper. cap. 221 087

MAIN: CB2 act. oper. cap. 221 091

Setting the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a limited time period).

External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Operation counter 210 043

DEV02: Operation counter 210 093

DEV03: Operation counter 210 143

DEV01: Dev. op. capability 210 003

DEV02: Dev. op. capability 210 053

DEV03: Dev. op. capability 210 103

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-106

Page 109: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Appendix – List of Bay Types (P632, P633 version -620 only) Key

Sorting the Bay Types

The bay types are sorted by the criteria listed below. These criteria are encoded in the first three characters of the bay type code (example: A11.100.R01) given in brackets after the Bay Type No. (example: Sorting is first by "Type of bay" in the order given below, then within each group by the second and third character in ascending order.

� Type of bay � A – Feeder Bay � L – Longitudinal Coupler � T – Transversal Coupler � K – Bus coupler and sectionalizer bay � M – Busbar Measurement � N – Busbar Grounding � X – Other bay type

� Number of busbars � - Single busbar � - Double busbar � - Without busbar / other configurations

� Equipment � - Bays with switch truck or withdrawable switchgear assembly � - Bays with two circuit breakers or switch disconnectors on switch trucks or

withdrawable switchgear assembly � - Bays with stationary switchgear units � - Bays with stationary switchgear units and three-position disconnector � - Other bay types

Bay Type No.: This number indicates the value to be set at M A I N : T y p e o f b a y (folder "Set/Conf") in order to configure the unit for the selected bay type.

Special Designations for External Devices: Mot.relay: Motor relay Shunt wd. Shunt winding

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-1

Page 110: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Table "Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays"

Column "Switchgear unit" This column begins with the designation for the external device (switchgear unit). The function group follows in brackets. The function group encompasses all setting options for monitoring the switchgear unit and its signals. "Open" and "Close(d)" indicate the signal message or control direction of the

switchgear unit.

Column "Binary Input": The "Open" or "Closed" signal should be connected to the binary input U xxxx. The connection points of the binary input U xxxx are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. For the P63x in 40TE case, the positions of the binary input boards are identified as follows: A: Slot 6

B: Slot 7 C: Slot 8

Column "Output relay" The "Open" or "Close" control of the switchgear unit is effected via output relay K xxxx. The connection points of the output relay K xxxx are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. For the P63X in 40TE case, the positions of the binary output boards are identified as follows: A: Slot 6

B: Slot 7

Table "Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking"

Note: The interlock equations are stored at substation control level, not at unit level.

Symbols used in the Boolean interlock equations: /: Negation 0: Switchgear unit "Open"I: Switchgear unit "Closed" X: Switchgear unit in intermediate position

FctBl1: Function block 1, configuration at M A I N : F c t . a s g . f c t . b l o c k . 1 (Folder "Par/Func/Cont/")

FctBl2: Function block 2, configuration at M A I N : F c t . a s g . f c t . b l o c k . 2 (Folder "Par/Func/Cont/")

U-App-2 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 111: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

List of P63x Bay Panel types

Bay type (Identification):

A – Feeder Bay L – Bus Sectionalizer Bay 2 (A11.100.R01)3 (A11.100.R02)4 (A11.101.R01)5 (A11.101.R02)6 (A11.101.R03)523 (A11.108.R01)7 (A11.200.R01)8 (A11.200.R02)9 (A11.201.R01)10 (A11.201.R02)11 (A11.201.R03)12 (A11.400.R01)13 (A11.400.R02)14 (A11.401.R01)15 (A11.401.R02)16 (A11.401.R03)17 (A11.900.R01)504 (A11.901.R00)541 (A13.104.R01)19 (A13.105.R01)20 (A13.105.R02)21 (A13.105.R03)557 (A13.106.R03)26 (A13.200.R01)28 (A13.201.R01)29 (A13.201.R02)31 (A13.205.R01)32 (A13.205.R02)33 (A13.205.R03)34 (A13.400.R01)36 (A13.401.R01)37 (A13.401.R02)39 (A13.405.R01)40 (A13.405.R02)41 (A13.405.R03)503 (A13.432.R02)507 (A13.433.R02)43 (A15.105.R01)221 (A15.105.R02)44 (A15.105.R03)87 (A23.104.R01)88 (A23.104.R03)101 (A23.204.R01)102 (A23.204.R03)115 (A23.404.R01)116 (A23.404.R03)

133 (L11.100.R01)553 (L11.100.R01.2)134 (L11.100.R02)528 (L11.102.R01)542 (L11.102.R01.2)135 (L11.104.R01)136 (L11.104.R02)137 (L11.104.R03)138 (L11.116.R01)545 (L11.116.R01.2)139 (L11.116.R03)148 (L11.200.R01)149 (L11.202.R01)150 (L11.202.R03)164 (L23.901.R02)

T – Bus Coupler Bay 505 (Q21.100.R01)563 (Q21.133.R01)205 (Q23.101.R01)206 (Q23.101.R03)

M – Busbar Measurement Bay 171 (M11.300.R00)172 (M11.300.R01)540 (M11.304.R02)173 (M11.900.R00)174 (M11.900.R01)176 (M13.312.R01)177 (M13.312.R02)506 (M13.902.R00)233 (M15.903.R01)179 (M15.903.R02)188 (M23.302.R02)189 (M23.312.R02)193 (M23.902.R02)559 (M23.904.R00)560 (M23.908.R00)194 (M23.912.R02)

E – Busbar Grounding Bay 130 (E13.901.R01)132 (E23.903.R02)

X – Other Bay Type 1 (X99.901.R00)

Customized Bay 999 (User)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-3

Page 112: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620

Bay Type No. 2 (A11.100.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-4 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 113: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 3 (A11.100.R02)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-5

Page 114: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 4 (A11.101.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-6 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 115: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 5 (A11.101.R02)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-7

Page 116: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 6 (A11.101.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-8 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 117: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 523 (A11.108.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

Q15 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-9

Page 118: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 7 (A11.200.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-10 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 119: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 8 (A11.200.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-11

Page 120: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 9 (A11.201.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-12 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 121: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 10 (A11.201.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-13

Page 122: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 11 (A11.201.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-14 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 123: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 12 (A11.400.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02 ///

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-15

Page 124: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 13 (A11.400.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-16 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 125: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 14 (A11.401.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02 /////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-17

Page 126: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 15 (A11.401.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 ///

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-18 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 127: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 16 (A11.401.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)

X0 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-19

Page 128: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 17 (A11.900.R01)

Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

X0 (DEV01) OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02

K A01 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

U-App-20 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 129: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 504 (A11.901.R00)

Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

X0 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-21

Page 130: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 541 (A13.104.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-22 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 131: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 19 (A13.105.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-23

Page 132: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 20 (A13.105.R02)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-24 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 133: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 21 (A13.105.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-25

Page 134: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 557 (A13.106.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q9 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

Q9 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

Q9 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-26 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 135: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 26 (A13.200.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01) OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02

K A01 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-27

Page 136: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 28 (A13.201.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q8 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-28 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 137: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 29 (A13.201.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q8 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-29

Page 138: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 31 (A13.205.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-30 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 139: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 32 (A13.205.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-31

Page 140: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 33 (A13.205.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

U-App-32 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 141: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 34 (A13.400.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U B05

K A01 K A02 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-33

Page 142: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 36 (A13.401.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q8 (DEV02)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02 ///

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-34 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 143: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 37 (A13.401.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q8 (DEV02)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-35

Page 144: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 39 (A13.405.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02 /////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-36 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 145: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 40 (A13.405.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 ///

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-37

Page 146: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 41 (A13.405.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

U-App-38 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 147: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 503 (A13.432.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q8 (DEV02)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-39

Page 148: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 507 (A13.433.R02)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q8 (DEV02)

Q15 (DEV03)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 ///

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-40 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 149: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 43 (A15.105.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Open (Q8=0)

Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Open (Q8=0)

Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-41

Page 150: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 221 (A15.105.R02)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Open (Q8=0)

Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Open (Q8=0)

Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-42 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 151: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 44 (A15.105.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Open (Q8=0)

Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Q8 Open (Q0=I)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Open (Q8=0)

Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

Q8 Open (Q0=I)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-43

Page 152: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 87 (A23.104.R01)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q2 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-44 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 153: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 88 (A23.104.R03)

Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q2 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)

Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-45

Page 154: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 101 (A23.204.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q2 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-46 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 155: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 102 (A23.204.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q2 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)

Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-47

Page 156: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 115 (A23.404.R01)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q2 (DEV03)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02 /////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-48 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 157: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 116 (A23.404.R03)

Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q1 (DEV02)

Q2 (DEV03)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)

Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-49

Page 158: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 133 (L11.100.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X01 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-50 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 159: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 553 (L11.100.R01.2)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X01 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-51

Page 160: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 134 (L11.100.R02)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X01 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X01 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X01 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-52 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 161: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 528 (L11.102.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

Q15 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-53

Page 162: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 542 (L11.102.R01.2)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

Q15 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-54 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 163: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 135 (L11.104.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X01 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-55

Page 164: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 136 (L11.104.R02)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X01 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X01 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X01 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

U-App-56 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 165: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 137 (L11.104.R03)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X01 (DEV02)

Q8 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (X01=0) & (Q8=I)

X01 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q8 Close(d) (X01=0)

X01 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-57

Page 166: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 138 (L11.116.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X01 (DEV02)

X02 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-58 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 167: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 545 (L11.116.R01.2)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X01 (DEV02)

X02 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-59

Page 168: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 139 (L11.116.R03)

Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X01 (DEV02)

X02 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X01 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

X02 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

X01 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

X02 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-60 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 169: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 148 (L13.200.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01) OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02

K A01 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-61

Page 170: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 149 (L13.202.R01)

Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q15 (DEV02)

Q16 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-62 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 171: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 150 (L13.202.R03)

Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q15 (DEV02)

Q16 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q15 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=I)

Q16 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q16=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q15 Close(d) (Q0=0)

Q16 Close(d) (Q0=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-63

Page 172: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 164 (L23.901.R02)

Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q11 (DEV01)

Q21 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q11 Open (Q11=0)

Close(d) (Q11=I)

Q21 Open (Q21=0)

Close(d) (Q21=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

U-App-64 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 173: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 505 (Q21.100.R01)

Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-65

Page 174: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 563 (Q21.133.R01)

Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

X01 (DEV02)

X02 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

U-App-66 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 175: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 205 (Q23.101.R01)

Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q10 (DEV02)

Q20 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 ////

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-67

Page 176: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 206 (Q23.101.R03)

Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01)

Q10 (DEV02)

Q20 (DEV03)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 K A05 K A06

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q10 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

Q20 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Q10 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

Q20 Open (Q0=0)

Close(d) (Q0=0)

U-App-68 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 177: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 171 (M11.300.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

X0 (DEV01)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U B05

///

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-69

Page 178: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 172 (M11.300.R01)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

X0 (DEV01)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U B05

K A01 K A02 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

U-App-70 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 179: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 540 (M11.304.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q15 (DEV01)

X0 (DEV02)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-71

Page 180: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 173 (M11.900.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

X0 (DEV01) OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02

//

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

U-App-72 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 181: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 174 (M11.900.R01)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

X0 (DEV01) OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02

K A01 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-73

Page 182: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 176 (M13.312.R01)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q1 (DEV01)

Q15 (DEV02)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02 ///

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

U-App-74 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 183: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 177 (M13.312.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q1 (DEV01)

Q15 (DEV02)

F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-75

Page 184: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 506 (M13.902.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q1 (DEV01) OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02

//

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

U-App-76 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 185: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 233 (M15.903.R01)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q1 (DEV01)

Q8 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 //

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-77

Page 186: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 179 (M15.903.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q1 (DEV01)

Q8 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)

Q8 Close(d) (Q1=0)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)

Q8 Close(d) (Q1=0)

U-App-78 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 187: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 188 (M23.302.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q1 (DEV01)

Q2 (DEV02)

F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011)

F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

U B06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 /

/

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-79

Page 188: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 189 (M23.312.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q15 (DEV01)

Q25 (DEV02)

F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011)

F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

U B06

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04 /

/

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)

Q25 Close(d) (Q25=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

U-App-80 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 189: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 193 (M23.902.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q1 (DEV01)

Q2 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-81

Page 190: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 559 (M23.904.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q15 (DEV01) OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02

//

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

U-App-82 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 191: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 560 (M23.908.R00)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q25 (DEV01) OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02

//

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-83

Page 192: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 194 (M23.912.R02)

Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q15 (DEV01)

Q25 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)

Q25 Close(d) (Q25=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

U-App-84 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 193: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 130 (E13.901.R01)

Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q15 (DEV01) OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02

K A01 K A02

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-85

Page 194: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 132 (E23.903.R02)

Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q15 (DEV01)

Q25 (DEV02)

OpenClose(d)OpenClose(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02 K A03 K A04

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)

Q25 Close(d) (Q25=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

U-App-86 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 195: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

Bay Type No. 1 (X99.901.R00)

Other bay type with other switchgear unit, without busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Interlock equations not defined

P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-87

Page 196: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620(continued)

U-App-88 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620

Page 197: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408
Page 198: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE

Phone: Fax:

+33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00

www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric

Publication: P63x/EN AD/Ak6 Version: -611 -620 11/2010

© 2

010

Sch

neid

er E

lect

ric. A

ll rig

hts

rese

rved

.

Page 199: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices

P63x/EN AD/Am6 (AFSV.12.10310 D)

Version P631 -308 -407/408 -621 P632 -308 -407/408 -621 P633 -308 -410/411/412 -621 P634 -308 -407/408 -621

Upgrade Documentation

Page 200: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408
Page 201: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation

With these latest versions for the transformer differential protection devices MiCOM P631, P632, P633 and P634 several new features and changes on existing features have been added. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below:

References Released Version Documentation

01.03.2006 P631-304-403/404-610 P632-304-403/404-610 P633-304-404/405/406-610 P634-304-403/404-610

Technical Manual P63X/EN M/Aa4 (AFSV.12.09700 D)

06.06.2008 P631-306/307/308-405/406/407/408 -611/620

P632-306/307/308-405/406/407/408 -611/620

P633-306/307/308-407/408/409/410/411/412 -611/620

P634-306/307/308-405/406/407/408 -611/620

Upgrade Documentation P63X/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D)

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-3

Page 202: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

1 Overview

Version Changes

P631-308-407/408 Hardware No modifications -620-718 Diagram No modifications

P632-308-407/408 -620-718 Software

P633-308-410/411/412 IEC Bug fixing pertaining to the COMTRADE fault files which a client-620-718 receives via the IEC 61850 interface:

P634-308-407/408 The correct number of binary channels is now entered in the-620-718 COMTRADE configuration file (*.cfg). In previous versions when,

because of the function configuration, n*16 binary information was Release: 18.09.2008 stored then the number of binary channels was given as n*16+1. Therefore the data stored in the *.cfg and the *.dat files did not match. The automatically generated data file names are now correct with fault numbers exceeding 999. Data file names are issued according to this format:

yyyymmdd_HHMMSS_xxx_rNNNN.eee With yyyy = year

mm = month dd = day HH = hour MM = minute SS = second xxx = millisecond r = permanent single character NNNN = fault number eee = file extension

In previous versions the dot (.) was overwritten for fault numbers exceeding 999.

Stating of 'Control Modes' in the ICD file has been corrected. The IEC data model is not affected by this.

LOC Bug fixing: Using the function where the set password can be made visible on the LC-display by pressing all four arrow keys simultaneously during the start up of the device is now also possible with the new local control panel (with function keys).

PSS Bug fixing: The time tags for the PSS: PS x act ive spontaneous signals (according to the communications protocol per IEC-60870-5-10x) and the entry in the operating data memory did not match.

MAIN Bug fixing: In offline operation mode, measured operating values for phase C were not calculated correctly with the 60 Hz nominal frequency.

V<> Bug fixing: After a warm restart the following setting was not active: V < > : t T r a n s i e n t P S x = Blocked.Because of this, the following signals were issued when undervoltage conditions were present:

042 023 V < > : t V < e l a p s . T r a n s i e n t 042 025 V<>: tV<< elapsed t rans.

Ä-4 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

Page 203: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

Version Changes

CBF_1 to The release condition for the function has been dissociated from CBF_4 the drop-out of the internal trip signal. Therefore the sequence will

now only be stopped when a loss of load/undercurrent condition has occurred or when the CB signals that its contacts are open.

Bug fixing: The time tags for the C B F _ n : R e a d y spontaneous signals (according to the communications protocol per IEC-60870-5-10x) and the entry in the operating data memory did not match.

Hardware No modifications P632-308-407/408-621 P631-308-407/408-621

Diagram No modifications P633-308-410/411/412-621

Software P634-308-407/408-621

Device The device’s capability to detect its hardware state has beenRelease: 08.01.2009 enhanced so that future Ethernet communication and binary

modules can be fitted without having to update the software.

The following addresses are now visible: 002 131 D V I C E : S W v e r s i o n D H M I 002 132 D V I C E : S W v e r s i o n D H M I D M

IEC The processing times for the control and monitoring of switchgear units between the Ethernet communication module and the main CPU have been reduced.

Bug fixing: The standardized model according to WYE class (e.g. 'phsA' instead of 'adphsA') is now applied with the data model for measured values for resultant current forming ('virtual end').

The data object LN_CFG has been extended in logical nodes Dt1NgsPTOC1, Dt2NgsPTOC1, Dt3NgsPTOC1.

Further logical nodes have been added: LN PloGGIO4 to the P631 LN PloGGIO4, IdcGGIO1, RtdGGIO1 to the P633 and P634

The AlmGGIO logical node has been extended by the following signals:

Alm5: 039 127 T H R M 1 : C T A e r r o r Alm6: 039 187 T H R M 2 : C T A e r r o r Alm7: 040 190 M E A S I : P T 1 0 0 o p e n c i r c u i t Alm8: 040 191 M E A S I : Over load 20mA input Alm9: 040 192 M E A S I : Open ci rc. 20mA inp. Alm10: 036 099 C T S : O p e r a t e d ( u p d a t i n g )

The 'Bl.f.' data objects are now available in all nodes: PTOC, PTOV, PTUV, PTTR, PTOF, PTUF, RBRF, PVPH. Because of this, the 'Blocking EXT' condition has been removed from the 'MODE'.

The parameter at address 104 232 I E C : D e a d b a n d V L L has been renamed to I E C : D e a d b a n d V

Since the corresponding measured values are not provided by the P63x, the following addresses have been deleted:

104 233 I E C : D e a d b a n d V P G 104 235 I E C : D e a d b a n d P 104 237 I E C : D e a d b a n d Z 104 239 I E C : D e a d b a n d A S C 104 060 I E C : U p d a t e c y c l e e n e r g y

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-5

Page 204: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

Version Changes

COMM1 Bug fixing with the use of the MODBUS communication protocol: Faults can now be read out.

MAIN The P633 and P634 now allow disconnection of individual ends by assigning functions to binary signal inputs.

Bug fixing: The measured operating values for the positive sequence currents are now calculated independently of the DTOC/IDMT protection functions.

Display of the following settings has been limited in accordance with the device function. Visible only in the P632/P633 are:

021 017 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 1 o p e n 021 020 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 1 c l o s e d 021 060 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 2 c l o s e d 021 061 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 2 o p e n

006 001 M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y 006 002 M A I N : D e v i c e O P E N k e y 006 003 M A I N : D e v i c e C L O S E k e y 006 004 M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y

Visible only in the P633 are:

021 062 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 3 c l o s e d 021 063 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 3 o p e n

DIFF The starting condition for the saturation discriminator has been enhanced by the addition of a further minimum condition for the restraining quantity with basic filtering. Without this minimum condition, the saturation discriminator could be incorrectly triggered during the test of a characteristic using virtual test signals in the absence of a preload current.

REF_1 Blocking of the REF functions while the DIFF protection (functional to REF_3 enhancement by -611-715) has been triggered can now be

enabled/disabled using setting parameters. Furthermore the R E F _ n : B l o c k i n g E X T binary signal input functions are now available to allow for a more flexible application of the functions. Since operational readiness is no longer solely dependent on the device setting, its state is also signaled: R E F _ n : R e a d y (= enabled AND NOT blocked).

REF_1 The function has been enhanced so that further ends can be included into the protection reach, e.g. in ground differential protection for autotransformers.

CBF_1 to As an option, the loss of load/undercurrent criterion can now also be used CBF_4 with the residual current.

The external function startup may now occur either when only the loss of load/undercurrent criterion is applied or also with the CB contact position scanning criterion.

Ä-6 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

Page 205: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

Version Changes

DEV02 to DEV10

Bug fixing: The menu text in the reference language (English) has been corrected for the following signals:

218 002 D E V 0 2 : S w i t c h . d e v i c e o p e n corrected to: 218 002 D E V 0 2 : O p e n c m d . r e c e i v e d

218 003 D E V 0 2 : S w i t c h . d e v i c e c l o s e d corrected to: 218 003 D E V 0 2 : C l o s e c m d . r e c e i v e d

etc. valid for all devices except DEV01.

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-7

Page 206: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

2 Functional Details

2.1 Main Functions of the P63x (Function Group MAIN)

Disconnecting ends With the P633 and P634, individual ends can now be disconnected when specific protections are applied or for test purposes.

Only one end can be disconnected with the P633. Up to two ends can be disconnected simultaneously with the P634.

If more ends are simultaneously disconnected from the measurement than is permitted, the S F M O N : U n s u f f . n o . o f e n d s alarm is issued and the device is blocked.

Such a disconnection of an end will result in the setting to zero of all current scan values for the relevant phase (phase current and residual current). All functions (e.g. protection functions, limit value monitoring, operating data measurement, etc.) will continue to operate unaffected, with these values set to zero. With the differential protection function the formula to calculate the restraining current is not changed by disconnecting ends, even though only two ends may be left.

Disconnecting ends may only be carried out with binary signal input functions. Starting via operating parameters (or command sent through a communications interface) is not possible.

041 019 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d A E X T 041 107 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d B E X T 041 128 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d C E X T 041 129 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d D E X T

The binary signal input functions listed above must be continuously present when disconnecting ends. To enable the disconnection function, one of the following additional conditions must be met:

� All three phase currents at the relevant end must be below 0.05 Inom:

Disconnection of the end will be permanent as soon as (immediately after) the binary signal input function has started and this loss of load/undercurrent condition is met.

Disconnection of the end will be permanently cancelled as soon as (immediately after) the binary signal input function has ended and this loss of load/undercurrent condition is met.

The P63x will continue to measure any current flow in the disconnected end in order to check this loss of load/undercurrent condition, but will not display these measured values.

� The disconnection function, as an alternative to the loss of load/undercurrent condition, can be enabled using another binary signal input function (041 148 M A I N : E n . d i s c . e n d x E X T ) .

As soon as both binary signal input functions are present, disconnection of the end will be effective.

As long as the enabling signal is not present at the binary signal input, there is no status change, i.e. an existing disconnection of an end will remain active independently of the disconnection request.

As soon as the disconnection request ends with the enable signal still present at the binary signal input then the disconnection of the end will be permanently cancelled.

Ä-8 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

Page 207: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

NoteAs shown in figure 1 both additional conditions are valid independently of each other, i.e. the following sequence is possible and requires appropriate care in the application:

1) The disconnection of an end is enabled by the additional condition: M A I N : E n . d i s c . e n d x E X T .

2) This enabling condition and the disconnection request will end, for instance, with a fault in the triggering circuit.

3) As soon as the measured current value in the disconnected end drops below the 0.05 Inom threshold then the disconnection will be cancelled.

The effective disconnection of an end is signaled by a state signal. 041 149 M A I N : E n d A d i s c o n n e c t e d 041 158 M A I N : E n d B d i s c o n n e c t e d 041 159 M A I N : E n d C d i s c o n n e c t e d 041 168 M A I N : E n d D d i s c o n n e c t e d

The storage of this state is fail-safe. During the device’s initialization after an auxiliary power supply failure, the stored state is compared with the current state of the input functions. If there is a discrepancy (e.g. M A I N : E n d A d i s c o n n e c t e d AND NOT M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d A E X T or vice versa) the alarm ( S F M O N : D i s c . E n d x i n v a l i d ) is issued and the device remains blocked. The disconnect condition is then continuously monitored and blocking is cancelled only when the discrepancy has ended. Since the alarm has been stored in the monitoring signal memory, it must be acknowledged by the user.

Setting or resetting the binary signal input is carried out by an internal function, with an operate/reset time-delay of approximately 0.5 s in order to prevent time propagation problems resulting from simultaneously switching on/off the auxiliary power supply and the signal voltage at the binary signal input.

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-9

Page 208: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

64Z6211A_EN

< 0.05 Inom

IA,a

MAIN: En. disc.end x EXT[ 041 148 ]

&

1

1

1S

R

MAIN: End adisconnected[ 041 149 ]

IB,a

IC,a

>1

& MAIN: DisconnectEnd A EXT[ 041 019 ]

MAIN: DisconnectEnd B EXT[ 041 107 ]

MAIN: DisconnectEnd C EXT[ 041 128 ]

MAIN: DisconnectEnd D EXT[ 041 148 ]

&

1

1

1S

R

MAIN: End bdisconnected[ 041 158 ] &

&

1

1

1S

R

MAIN: End cdisconnected[ 041 159 ] &

&

1

1

1S

R

MAIN: End ddisconnected[ 041 168 ] &

< 0.05 Inom

>1

< 0.05 Inom

>1

< 0.05 Inom

>1

SFMON: Unsuff.no. of ends[ 091 010 ]

P633: >1 End disconnected P634: >2 Ends disconnected

IA,b

IB,b

IC,b

IA,c

IB,c

IC,c

IA,d

IB,d

IC,d

&

&

&

&

Disconnection logic

Ä-10 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

U-1

Page 209: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

2.2 Ground Differential Protection (Function Groups REF_n)

Blocking ground differential protection

Blocking of the REF_n functions when the DIFF protection (functional enhancement of version -611-715) was triggered may now be enabled/disabled using setting parameters. Furthermore, binary signal input functions (R E F _ n : B l o c k i n g E X T ) are now available to allow for a more flexible application of the functions. Since operational readiness is no longer solely dependent on the device setting, the R E F _ n : R e a d y state is also indicated.

0: No1: Yes

REF_1: Enabled[ 041 132 ]

PSU: PS x active[ * ]

0: No1: Yes

0: No1: Yes

REF_1: Generalenable USER[ 019 050 ]

0 1

REF_1: EnablePSx[ * ]

0 1

REF_1: Bl.f.DIFFtrigg. PSx[ * ]

0 1

DIFF: Meas.system1 trigg.[ 041 124 ]

DIFF: Meas.system2 trigg.[ 041 125 ]

DIFF: Meas.system3 trigg.[ 041 126 ]

REF_1: BlockingEXT[ 019 051 ]

x PSU: PS x active

1 036 090 2 036 091 3 036 092 4 036 093

REF_1: Ready[ 019 054 ]

>1

>1

REF_1: Enable REF_1: Bl.f.DIFFParameter PSx trigg. PSx set 1 072 141 080 006 set 2 073 141 081 006 set 3 074 141 082 006 set 4 075 141 083 006

64Z5300C_EN

Enabling, disabling and readiness of ground differential protection

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-11

U-1

Page 210: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

U-2

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

Protection of autotransformers

Up to now the REF-function could only be applied with the high impedance principle to protect autotransformers (or, in general, electrically-connected multiple end configurations) from internal ground faults. Function group REF_1 has now been enhanced so as to provide a protection function, stabilized by a characteristic, for such protected objects. A typical example with an autotransformer is displayed in the next figure. In this case, the phase currents in ends a and b as well as the neutral-point current must be considered.

Σ(Ix,b)= IN,b

IA,b IB,b IC,b

IA,a IB,a IC,a

Σ(Ix,a)= IN,a

IN,a

Currents with an autotransformer

For such applications with REF_1, all the other ends (b, c, d – dependent on the type of device) may now be selected, and end a is still permanently included in the protection function.

019 120 R E F _ 1 : A d d . m e a s . i n p . e n d b = Yes / No

019 121 R E F _ 1 : A d d . m e a s . i n p . e n d c = Yes / No

019 122 R E F _ 1 : A d d . m e a s . i n p . e n d d = Yes / No

The neutral-point current is still permanently assigned to the measuring input for end a (T14).

Ä-12 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

Page 211: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

A further amplitude matching factor is calculated and displayed by the device for each end added.

All currents involved must be referred to a common reference value as this application entails protection of an electric node in a zero-sequence system. This common reference current value is calculated based on the settable reference power and the nominal voltage for end a. This calculation has not been changed from previous versions. The amplitude matching factors then result from the ratio of the primary transformer current values for the relevant end and the common reference current value.

Reference current Iref =Sref ,prim

⋅3 Vnom,prim,a

Amplitude matching factor kamp,x = Inom,CT ,prim,x

Iref

for x = End a,b,c or d

With Sref,prim = 019 031 R E F _ 1 : R e f e r e n c e p o w e r S r e f Vnom,prim,A = 019 017 M A I N : V n o m p r i m . e n d a P S 1 Inom,CT,prim,A = 019 020 M A I N : I n o m C . T . p r i m . , e n d a Inom,CT,prim,B = 019 021 M A I N : I n o m C . T . p r i m . , e n d b Inom,CT,prim,C = 019 022 M A I N : I n o m C . T . p r i m . , e n d c Inom,CT,prim,D = 019 026 M A I N : I n o m C . T . p r i m . , e n d d

The reference current and matching factors are displayed at the P63x.

As before, the P63x checks that the reference current and matching factors remain within the permitted ranges. The permitted range for the reference current can be looked up in the S&R-103 setting and recording software. The following rule applies to the matching factors:

� The largest matching factor must be ≤ 16.

� The value for the second largest matching factor must come to ≥ 0.5.

There are no restrictions concerning further possible matching factors.

Should the P63x calculate a common reference current value or matching factors not satisfying the above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P63x will automatically be blocked .

The measured values are multiplied by the matching factors and they are then available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer back to the relevant reference current rather than to the transformer nominal current or the nominal current of the device.

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-13

Page 212: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

As shown below, the differential current is formed from the sum of all phase currents involved and the neutral-point current:

kamp,a ⋅ IN,a + kamp,b ⋅ IN,b (+...) + kamp,N ⋅ Ia,NIdiff ,N =

= kamp,a ⋅Σ{IA,a , IB,a , IC,a }+ kamp,b ⋅Σ{ IA,b , IB,b , IC,b} (+...) + kamp,N ⋅ Ia,N

The calculation of the restraining current depends on the set operating mode.

If the operating mode is set to 'Low imped. / sum(IP)', the restraining current is calculated from the sum of all involved ends:

IR,N = kamp,a ⋅ IN,a + kamp,b ⋅ IN,b (+...)

= kamp,a ⋅Σ{ IA,a , IB,a , IC,a }+ kamp,b ⋅Σ{ IA,b , IB,b , IC,b} (+...)

If the operating mode is set to 'Low imped. / IP,max', the formula to calculate the restraining current remains unchanged from the application for a single end. But now the highest phase current is calculated from the amplitude-matched sum of the currents on the relevant phase of all ends involved.

IR,N = 1 (max{ I A , IB , IC }+ kamp,N ⋅ ) (unchanged )Ia,N2

with I x = kamp,a ⋅ I x,a + kamp,b ⋅ I x,b (+....) , for x = A, B or C

The value pairs (Id,N/IR,N) calculated with the above formula are then compared with the already identified pick-up characteristics of the ground differential protection function.

Ä-14 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

Page 213: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

2.3 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)

Current flow monitoring The existing line-associated current flow monitoring function has been enhanced by a residual current monitoring function which can be enabled/disabled.

For this either the residual current value measured directly at the CT or the value derived from the three phase currents may be used.

But this choice is only possible when a measuring input for the residual current is available. There is no measuring input for the residual current available with the P631 or for end d on the P634. In these cases, the internally derived value of the residual current is always used, regardless of the setting.

As long as a residual current exceeding the comparator threshold is flowing, the current flow criterion is not met and the corresponding signal (C B F _ n : C u r r e n t f l o w N ) is issued. When the residual current monitoring function is disabled, no monitoring is carried out and the C B F _ n : C u r r e n t f l o w N = No signal is issued continuously.

IA

IB

IC

IN

CBF_1: I<

[ 022 160 ]

>1

CBF_1: IN<[ 022 180 ]

CBF_1: Eval-uation IN[ 022 184 ]

0: Without 1: Calculated 2: Measured C1

c2

+ Σ + +

2

1 … 2

1

>1

0

1

2

CBF_1: Current flow A[ 038 230 ]

CBF_1: Current flow B[ 038 231 ]

CBF_1: Current flow C[ 038 232 ]

CBF_1: Current flow Phx[ 038 233 ]

CBF_1: Current flow N[ 038 235 ]

CBF_1: IN

64Z1103C_EN

U-3 Current flow monitoring

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-15

Page 214: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

Startup The external startup of the circuit breaker failure function (CBF_n) has been modified. The CBF function is always started when there is current flowing during a startup. But, if no current flow is apparent, the CBF function is only started when the external startup has been selected. For this, the selection table for the C B F _ n : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x . setting parameter has been extended and now includes the C B F _ n : S t a r t 3 p E X T signal.

The startup of the circuit breaker failure function by the internal Trip command remains unchanged.

As of version –620, the release condition for the CBF function has been dissociated from the startup condition (internal trip command or external startup). Once started, the CBF function will only drop out when a successful opening has been detected from the current flow monitoring or, in some cases, from the CB contact position signal.

Ä-16 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621

Page 215: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation(continued)

CBF_1: Fct.assignm. CBAux.

[ 022 159 ]

m out of n Signal 1Signal 2Signal n

Selected signals

CBF_1: I<

[ 022 160 ]

IA

CBF_1: CB pos.implausible[ 038 210 ]

INP: Fct.assignm. U xxx

[ xxx yyy ]

U x01

U x02

U x03

U xnn

Address 038 209 CBF_1: Startenable EXT[ 038 209 ]CBF_1: Start 3p EXT[ 038 205 ]

CBF_1: Start withman. trip

[ 022 154 ]

0

1

MAIN: Manual tripsignal[ 034 017 ]

MAIN: Trip cmd.blocked[ 021 013 ]

64Z1104D_EN

0: No1: Yes

CBF_1: Startup 3p[ 038 211 ]

IB

IC

CBF_1: Fct.assign. starting

[ 022 202 ]

MAIN: Gen. tripsignal 1[ 036 005 ]

MAIN: Gen. tripsignal 2[ 036 023 ]

MAIN: Gen. tripsignal 3[ 036 108 ]

MAIN: Gen. tripsignal 4[ 036 109 ]

&

&

&

&

& &

&

&

&

& & &

>1

1

1

1S

R

&

&

>1

>1

1

1

1S

R

&

>1

CBF: Current flow N[ 038 235 ]

MAIN: CB1 open 3pEXT[ 031 028 ]

MAIN: CB1 closed3p EXT[ 036 051 ]

Gen.trip signal 1

Gen.trip signal 2

Gen.trip signal 3

Gen.trip signal 4

U-4 Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection

P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-17

Page 216: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408
Page 217: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408
Page 218: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE

Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric

Publication: P63x/EN AD/Am6 Version: -621 11/2010

© 2

010

Sch

neid

er E

lect

ric. A

ll rig

hts

rese

rved

.

Page 219: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408
Page 220: P63x/EN M/Bm6 - 슈나이더 일렉트릭 · MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408

Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE

Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric

Publication: P63x/EN M/Bm6 Version: -610 -611 -620 -621, Volume 2 01/2011

© 2

011

Sch

neid

er E

lect

ric. A

ll rig

hts

rese

rved

.